1

Michael Raduga

I School of Out-of-Body Travel

A Practical Guidebook
This book is free via Internet, so feel free to distribute it! Send it to all your friends! Post it on your sites and blogs!
www.obe4u.com Translated by Peter Orange

The practice of phase states of the mind is the hottest and most promising pursuit of the modern age. nli!e in the past, the notions of "out#of#body e$perience% and "astral pro&ection% have already lost their mystical halo, and their real basis has been studied in minute detail from the most non#nonsense approach. 'o(, this phenomenon is accessible to everyone, regardless of their (orldvie(. It is no( !no(n ho( to easily master it and apply it effectively. This te$tboo! gives each and every person something that previously could only be dreamt about # a parallel reality and the possibility of e$isting in t(o (orlds. This boo! is for pragmatic people (ho are not used to ta!ing anything on faith or reading about empty theories. The boo! only deals (ith (hat (or!s in practice, and nothing else. Proposals regarding translating and publishing this boo! and other (or!s of M. Raduga may be sent to obe4u@obe4u.com

Table of *ontents+ Part I Entering the Out-of-Body State Cha ter ! " General Background The ,ssence of the Phase Phenomenon -hy ,nter the Phase. The /ifestyle of a Practitioner 0lgorithm for Mastering the Phase Types of Techni1ues *ontraindications Recommendations for sing the 2uideboo! ,$ercises for *hapter 1 Cha ter # " Indirect Techni$ues The *oncept of Indirect Techni1ues Primary Indirect Techni1ues 3econdary Indirect Techni1ues 3electing the Right Techni1ues 3eparation Techni1ues The 4est Time to Practice *onscious 0(a!ening 0(a!ening (ithout Moving *ycles of Indirect Techni1ues 5ints from the Mind 0ggression and Passivity 3trategy for 0ction Typical Mista!es (ith Indirect Techni1ues ,$ercises for *hapter ) Cha ter % " &irect Techni$ues The *oncept of 6irect Techni1ues The 4est Time to Practice Intensity of 0ttempts 4ody Position 7

6uration of an 0ttempt Rela$ation 8ariations of sing 6irect Techni1ues The 9ree#floating 3tate of Mind 0u$iliary 9actors 3trategy for 0ction Typical Mista!es (ith 6irect Techni1ues ,$ercises for *hapter 7 Cha ter ' " Beco(ing Conscious )hile &rea(ing The *oncept of Techni1ues Involving 4ecoming *onscious (hile 6reaming Techni1ues for 4ecoming *onscious in a 6ream 0ctions to be 6one (hen 4ecoming *onscious (hile 6reaming 3trategy for 0ction Typical Mista!es (hen Practicing 4ecoming *onscious (hile 6reaming ,$ercises for *hapter : Cha ter * " +on-autono(ous ,ethods The ,ssence of 'on#autonomous Methods for ,ntering the Phase *ueing Technologies -or!ing in Pairs Technologies for Inducing the Phase 5ypnosis and 3uggestion Physiological 3ignals *hemical 3ubstances The 9uture of 'on#autonomous Methods for ,ntering the Phase Typical Mista!es (ith 'on#autonomous Techni1ues ,$ercises for *hapter ; Part II ,anaging the Out-of-Body E- erience :

Cha ter . " &ee ening The *oncept of 6eepening Primary 6eepening Techni1ues 6eepening through 3ensory 0mplification 3econdary 6eepening Techni1ues 2eneral 0ctivity Typical Mista!es 6uring 6eepening ,$ercises for *hapter < Cha ter / " ,aintaining The 2eneral *oncept of Maintaining Techni1ues and Rules against Returning to the 4ody Techni1ues and Rules for Resisting 9alling 0sleep Techni1ues against an nrecogni=ed Phase 2eneral Rules for Maintaining Typical Mista!es (ith Maintaining ,$ercises for *hapter > Cha ter 0 " Pri(ary Skills The ,ssence of Primary 3!ills 6iscerning the Phase ,mergency Return. Paralysis 9ighting 9ear *reation of 8ision *ontact (ith /iving Ob&ects Reading 8ibrations Techni1ues for Translocating through Ob&ects 9light 3uper#abilities The Importance of *onfidence *ontrolling Pain Moral 3tandards in the Phase 3tudying Possibilities and 3ensations Typical Mista!es (ith Primary 3!ills ;

,$ercises for *hapter ? Cha ter 1 " Translocation and 2inding Ob3ects The ,ssence of Translocation and 9inding Ob&ects 4asic Property of the Phase 3pace Techni1ues for Translocation Ob&ect 9inding Techni1ues Typical Mista!es (ith Translocation and 9inding Ob&ects ,$ercises for *hapter @ Cha ter !4 " A lication The ,ssence of 0pplications for Phase 3tates 0pplications 4ased on 3imulation 0pplications 4ased on *ontact (ith the 3ubconscious Mind 0pplication 4ased on Influencing Physiology nproven ,ffects se of the Phase by the 6isabled Typical Mista!es (hen sing 0pplications ,$ercises for *hapter 1A Part III Au-iliary Infor(ation Cha ter !! " 5seful Ti s 0 Pragmatic 0pproach Independent 0nalysis 0pproach to /iterature Practice ,nvironment Tal!ing (ith /i!e#minded People The Right -ay to Beep a Cournal Cha ter !# " Practitioners6 E- eriences The 3ignificance of Other PeopleDs ,$periences 0nalysis of 3elected PractitionersE ,$periences ,$ercises for *hapter 1) <

Cha ter !% " Putting a 2ace on the Pheno(enon 3tephen /aberge *arlos *astaneda Robert 0. Monroe Patricia 2arfield 3ylvan Muldoon *harles /eadbeater Robert 4ruce Richard -ebster *harles Tart Cha ter !' " 2inal Test A endi0ssessment of PractitionersD ,$periences Fchapter 1)G 0ns(ers to the 9inal Test Fchapter 1:G 0 3implified 6escription of the ,asiest Method for ,ntering the Phase using Indirect Techni1ues Ta!e Part in Research The *ell Phone Techni1ue 0ttention! The 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel 4rief 2lossary of Terms and 6efinitions

>

2ore7ord This guideboo! is the result of ten years of e$tremely active personal practice and study of the out#of#body phenomenonFthe phaseG, coupled (ith having successfully taught it to thousands of people. I !no( all of the obstacles and problems that are usually run into (hen getting to !no( this phenomenon, and have tried to protect future practitioners from them in this boo!. This guideboo! (as not created for those (ho prefer light, empty reading. It is for those (ho (ould li!e to learn something. It contains no speculations or stories, only dry, hard facts and techni1ues in combination (ith a completely pragmatic approach and clear procedures for action. They have all been successfully verified by a vast number of practitioners that often had no prior e$perience. In order to achieve the same result, it is only necessary to read through each section thoroughly and complete the assignments. The boo! is beneficial not only for beginners, but also for those (ho already !no( (hat it feels li!e to have an out#of#body encounter and have a certain amount of e$perience, as this guideboo! is devoted not only to entering the state, but also e1ually dedicated to controlling it. *ontrary to popular opinion, there is nothing difficult about this phenomenon if one tries to attain it (ith regular and right effort. On average, results are reached in less than a (ee! if attempts are made every day. More often than not, the techni1ues (or! in literally a couple of attempts. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel January 11, 2 !

Part ! Entering the Phase State

Cha ter ! " General Background

T8E ESSE+CE O2 T8E P8ASE P8E+O,E+O+ The term phase state For simply phaseG encompasses a number of (idely !no(n dissociative phenomena, many of (hich are referred to by various terms, such as astral or out-of-"ody e#perience. This concept also includes the more pragmatic term lucid drea$ing, but does not al(ays e$ist in the sense and form implied by that e$pression. 5ence, the term phase has been introduced to ease the study of phenomena that e$ist beyond habitual H and often unfair # associations and stereotypes. The term out-of-"ody e#perience is accurate to the e$tent that it describes the sensation felt by a person e$periencing the phase phenomenon. % phase has t&o pri$ary attri"utes' 1() practitioners possess full, conscious a&areness during the e#perience, and 2() practitioners recogni*e a genuine separation fro$ the physical "ody( 3imultaneously, the degree to (hich practitioners perceive the phase environment affects the level of sensory e$periences therein, (hich often occur in a higher form than the sensory e$periences of (a!efulness. This concept is difficult to imagine (ithout firsthand e$perience of the phase. 0nd so, it is not (ithout reason that this practice is considered to be a higher state of self#hypnosis or meditation, and is often referred to under different names as the highest possible human achievement in various religious and mystical movements Fyoga, 4uddhism, etc.G.

In essence, the phase is an une$plored state of mind (here one is unable to control and feel his physical body. Instead, his space perception is filled (ith realistic phantom e$periences. Interesting Fact! Sensations in the phase state can "e so realistic that practitioners &ho unintentionally enter phase often "elieve they are still in the physical "ody, that the e#perience is occurring in the &a+ing state( These types of unintended e#cursions $ost often occur at night or early in the $orning( It is believed that up to one 1uarter of the human population has encountered this phenomenon. 5o(ever, if variations and different degrees of intensity of the state are ta!en into consideration, it may be safely assumed that everyone has encountered the phase. 3ince the phase is a rare sub&ect of study, many (ho inadvertently enter it do not reali=e (hat has ta!en place once they return to (a!efulness. Many do not assign any significance to the occurrence of a phase environment that is not fully formed because shallo( phases donDt leave the same &olting impression as deep states. ,lusive as the phase may seem, this is an e$tremely common phenomenon, accessible to 1A

anyone (illing to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of achieving and maintaining the phase. )89 E+TE: T8E P8ASE; 3uch a 1uestion can only arise from not fully understanding the properties of the phenomenon and its nature. -hen one suddenly understands at a certain moment that he is &ust as real as he normally is, and is standing some(here that is not in the physical (orld (ith his same hands and body, and can touch everything around him and discern fine details, such much emotion stirs up inside him that no 1uestions arise at all. This is the $ost a$a*ing e#perience that a person can attain, The initial phase encounter is al(ays &olting and sometimes frightening. 6epending on the individual, fear e$perienced during initial encounters (ith the phase occurs in about one#third of all cases. ,ven veteran practitioners encounter fear, (hich spea!s to the profound nature of the phase state. -ith time, as rapture ebbs and emotions (ane, thoughts turn from the fact of the phenomenon itself to(ards ho( to someho( use it. 0nd here, a fantastically diverse field of practical application opens up before the practitioner. These applications H (hich this boo! communicates H are not to be associated (ith the many unproven and dubious methods often described in sundry esoteric literature. The information presented herein is verifiable, practical, and attainable. -hatever the nature of the phase # a state of mind, or perhaps an e$ternal e$perience # this is the sole opportunity to+ visit any part of the (orld or universeI see people (ho are out#of#reach in real life, including relatives, the deceased, celebrities, and various creaturesI communicate (ith the enormous resources of the subconscious mind and obtain information from itI reali=e desires that are unattainable in real lifeI model artistic productionsI influence physiology, and more. These are not dull e$periences. They are eminently personal and real. T8E <I2EST9<E O2 A P:ACTITIO+E: 11

It must be said that various diets, e$ercises, rituals, and so forth do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper practice of the phase. 'aturally e$istent psychological and physiological comfort is of the utmost importance. Thus, methods recommending overeating, under#eating, or tormenting oneself (ith various diets and strange e$ercises are useless and ultimately detrimental to a practitionerDs (ellness and balance, invariably producing a negative impact to the effectiveness of techni1ues taught in this guideboo!. 0dditionally, no meaningful association has been found bet(een practice of the phase and (hat may be construed as "bad habits%. Regardless of a lifestyleDs null effect on phase achievement, a healthy, active lifestyle (ill al(ays be recommended to en&oy a good 1uality of living. Interesting Fact! -f one "elieves that it is necessary to position one.s "ed &ith the head"oard facing the /orth&est or so$e other direction in order to have $ore effective out-of-"ody e#periences, then doing so &ill invaria"ly have a positive effect on results( 0o&ever, the issue at hand is not the positioning of the "ody, "ut a "elief that is a+in to an intention, &hich in turn is enor$ously i$portant( It has been observed that a regular and orderly lifestyle increases the fre1uency of genuine, lasting phase e$periences. 3leeping normally and soundly is the most basic e$ample of a lifestyle choice that produces direct, positive impact on results, especially (hen a practitioner commits to a full nightEs rest several times a (ee!. A<GO:IT8, 2O: ,ASTE:I+G T8E P8ASE 0 novice practitioner must understand the procedure for learning and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of several primary steps, each of (hich is a uni1ue science unto itself. 1)

1. The first and most important step addresses the techni1ues used to enter the phase state. It is not necessary to master every type of entrance techni1ue Fdirect, indirect, dream consciousnessG. /earning and applying the easiest techni1ues provides the necessary prere1uisites to more advanced methods. If so desired, it is possible to try more difficult entrance techni1ues in parallel (ith the moving on to the subse1uent steps for mastering the phase. ). *ontrary to popular opinion, the need for conscious techni1ues does not cease upon phase entrance. It is absolutely necessary to learn and apply methods for deepening the phase to achieve a consistently hyper#realistic environment. 9ailing to apply deepening techni1ues almost guarantees that e$periences (ill be dull, uninteresting, and subse1uent practice short#lived. Practitioners should immediately learn and apply deepening techni1ues after mastering any one entrance method. 7. The third step involves mastering techni1ues for maintaining the phase, as (ithout them the average person (ould have phase e$periences of much shorter duration than is possible. -hen in the phase, the 1uestion of ho( to leave it almost never occurs. On the contrary, one is normally thrust from it in the course of several seconds if one simply does nothing. :. 0fter learning all the necessary techni1ues for mastering the phase state, it is time to learn and apply methods of control, (hich encompass the ability to translocate, find and interact (ith ob&ects, influence surroundings, and so forth. ;. Once the previously noted steps have been accomplished, a practitioner may proceed to apply phase e$periences to enhance everyday life. Over the course of this guideboo!, (e (ill e$amine do=ens of these valuable applications in great detail.

17

-ith basic s!ills mastered, remember that practicing the phase is (orth(hile and effective only (hen the results are consistent. If a practitioner enters the phase only once a month, the e$perience (ill be too emotional to allo( the observation of important principles and methodologies. The phase should be encountered at least once a (ee!. -or!ing to(ard a level higher than a (ee!ly phase entry is ambitious, even beneficial. Realistically, t(o to four phase e$periences per (ee! might be considered the level of a grandmaster, but this is far from the up(ard boundary. 0s a rule, novice practitioners achieve the phase less often than is desired. 5o(ever, (ith regular attempts, success occurs more and more fre1uently, (hich should help alleviate any frustration resulting from failed attempts. T9PES O2 TEC8+I=5ES There are three primary types of techni1ues that ma!e it possible to enter the phase+ direct, indirect and drea$ consciousness. These methods are performed (hile lying do(n or reclining, eyes closed, the body in a state of total rela$ation. Interesting Fact! Often, people have an out-of-"ody e#perience &ithout prior +no&ledge or 1:

"elief in the pheno$enon( -t 1ust happens, and a large "ody of evidence has "een gathered to support this fact( 2ven $ore interesting is that spontaneous e#periences often occur after a "rief study of $aterial a"out the topic, li+e this guide"oo+((( 3irect techni4ues are perfor$ed &ithout any noticea"le lapse in consciousness( 5hile practicing direct techni4ues, a lapse into sleep for less than 6 $inutes is not considered a "reach of the techni4ue( 4y definition, direct techni1ues encompass the performance of specific actions for a pre#defined interval of time. 3uccessfully applied, direct methods result in a phase entrance (ithout passing through any intermediary states. 9or @AJ of the population, these techni1ues are the most difficult because the mind naturally e$ists in an e$cessively active state. It has been clearly proven (ithin the 3choolDs student body that novice practitioners do not benefit from beginning a training regimen (ith direct techni1ues. This is because direct techni1ues re1uire a thorough understanding and masterful application of indirect techni1ues in order to be effective. The incorrect notion that the phase state is e$tremely difficult to enter is due to the fact that people are more often dra(n to the more difficult direct techni1ues. It is al(ays better to approach direct techni1ues only after becoming e$pert in the use of indirect techni1ues. -ndirect techni4ues are techni4ues that are put into practice upon a&a+ening fro$ sleep( The effectiveness of indirect techni1ues is not dependent on the length of the prere1uisite sleep cycle. Indirect techni1ues can be used (hile e$iting a full nightDs sleep, after a daytime catnap, or follo(ing several hours of deep sleep. The most important thing is that there is a lapse of consciousness into sleep before implementing the techni1ues. Indirect techni1ues are the easiest techni1ues to practice, (hich is (hy many practitioners use them to enter the phase. 3leep naturally provides the mind (ith deep rela$ation, (hich is often difficult to 1;

ac1uire by other methods. 3ince sleep is re1uired to perform indirect techni1ues, it is a convenient, oft#occurring means to conduct e$periments (ith the phase. 'ovice practitioners benefit greatly from the use of indirect techni1ues, and learn firsthand the possibility of phase entrance. 3rea$ consciousness is ac4uired "y techni4ues that allo& entrance to the phase through &hat is co$$only referred to as lucid drea$ing( In this case, the phase begins (hen the a(areness that a dream is occurring happens (ithin the dream itself. 0fter becoming conscious (hile dreaming, several types of actions can be performed, including returning to the body and rolling out, (hich (ill be described later. -hen deepening techni1ues are applied in the conte$t of a conscious dream, the sensory perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal (a!efulness. Techni1ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually categori=ed separately from methods used to perform out#of#body travelI in practice, ho(ever, it is apparent that the characteristics of dream consciousness and out#of#body travel are identical, (hich places both phenomena directly in the phase. These practices are difficult because, unli!e other techni1ues, they do not involve specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 0 large measure of preparatory steps must be observed that re1uire time and effort (ithout any guarantee of results. 5o(ever, dream consciousness techni1ues are not as difficult as direct techni1ues. Moreover, the ma&ority of practitioners, (hether using indirect or direct techni1ues, e$perience spontaneous a(areness (hile dreaming (ithout having to apply techni1ues aimed at dream consciousness. In addition to the techni1ues described above, there are also non# autonomous means and tools+ various devices, programs, e$ternal influences, and so forth, (hich can be used to enter the phase. It is necessary to mention that these are only useful to practitioners (ho are able to enter the phase (ithout supplementary assistance. 1<

8arious chemical substances and herbal supplements have been recommended to assist phase entrance, though using them is unli!ely to do any good, and use of these has never yielded the effect that can be achieved through unadulterated practice. 0s such, the use of a chemical crutch is regarded here as completely unacceptable. CO+T:AI+&ICATIO+S ,$act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous H or even safe # does not e$istI there has never been an e$haustive, controlled study to prove either supposition. 5o(ever, since the phase e$ists at the fringes of naturally#occurring states of mind, it can hardly be assumed dangerous. 'otably, the phase is accompanied by rapid eye movement FR,MG, (hich every human e$periences for up to ) hours each night, and this begins to e$plain the phase e$perience as entirely safe and natural. 0lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the phase on the physical mind and bodyI namely, the emotional effects that can occur during the onset of the phase state. Phase entry is a very profound, incredible e$perience that may induce fear, (hich is invo!ed by a natural instinct for self# preservation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true for novices and those poorly ac1uainted (ith the nature of the phenomenon and techni1ues used to control it. -ithout !no(ledge and proper practice, a fear#induced reaction can escalate into full# blo(n terror. 0fter all, (hile in the phase, fantasy 1uic!ly becomes reality, and reticent fears can ta!e on hyper#realistic 1ualities. -hen this occurs, itDs not the phase environment, but the fear that is treacherous. It goes (ithout saying that fear is a to$ic influence, especially to sensitive souls, the elderly, and people (ith physical ailments, li!e certain cardiovascular conditions. This does not mean that persons in these groups should abstain from practicing the phase. The solution is to learn about and avoid common stressors associated (ith the practice, !no( the mechanics of controlling ob&ects, and understand the principles of ma!ing an emergency e$it. 1>

2iven the possibility of negative phase e$periences, it could be advised that practitioners limit the time in phase to fifteen minutes, though it is 1uite e$ceptional to maintain the phase for such duration. Proposed time limits are entirely theoretical and motivated by the fact that natural R,M does not normally last longer than fifteen minutes, and, at the ris! of side effects due to the alteration of natural cycles, e$periments directed at unnaturally prolonging R,M are not recommended. :ECO,,E+&ATIO+S 2O: 5SI+G T8E G5I&EBOO> 6uring classroom instruction at the 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel, several !ey factors are !no(n to produce positive and negative effects to(ard the li!elihood of success during individual practice+ Positive Effect on Practice 0ttentive, thorough study of the course material *onsistent (or! (ith practical elements. 6iligent completion of technical elements. 0 rela$ed approach to the sub&ect matter. Beeping a &ournal of all initial attempts, follo(ed by recording successful phase entrances. 0dhering to the recommended number of daily entrance attempts. Regular attempts and practice. 1? +egative Effect on Practice 5asty and inattentive study of course materials. Inconsistent application of techni1ues. 0ppro$imating the techni1ues outside of recommended guidelines. 0 hysterical approach to the matter, "idKe fi$e%. 0 lac! of personal analysis (hen problems or a lac! of success are encountered. ,$cessive number of attempts per day. 3poradic practice regimen.

nderstanding that the author !no(s his field (ell

"I also !no( everything I need to and (ill do as I (antL. This attitude is good only for those (ho have a great amount of real practical e$perience. Reading a lot on the sub&ect or simply having !no(ledge of it is not e$perience.

E-ercises for Cha ter !

=uestions 1. -hich alternative states are included in the term "phase%. ). 5o( does the phase differ from out#of#body travel. 7. Is the perception of reality different in (a!ing life than in the phase (orld. :. 6oes the phase have applications to day#to#day life. ;. -hat s!ills must be learned before proceeding to practical use of the phase. <. 5o( many types of autonomous phase entrance techni1ues are there. >. -hat is the difference bet(een direct and indirect techni1ues. ?. -hich techni1ues are easiest for the ma&ority of practitioners. @. Is it (orth trusting various devices and programs that promise to be able to help one enter the phase state. -hy or (hy not. 1A. 3hould one eat meat (hen practicing the phase.

1@

Tasks 1. ). 7. Try to remember if you have e$perienced phase encounters in the past. If you have encountered the phase, (hat type of techni1ue gained entranceI direct, indirect, or conscious dreaming. If possible, as! some friends and ac1uaintances about the sub&ect of out#of#body travel or conscious dreaming. 6o any of them remember a similar e$perience. -hat (as it li!e.

Cha ter # " Indirect Techni$ues

T8E CO+CEPT O2 I+&I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES 2enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun (ith the easiest, most accessible methods+ indirect techni1ues, (hich are conscious actions performed upon a(a!ening from sleep. 3ome critics incorrectly assume that indirect techni1ues are not ideal, and prefer to start (ith direct techni1ues. 5o(ever, doing so provides no guarantee for success and results in a large amount of (asted time and effort. Starting practice &ith indirect techni4ues guarantees entrance into the phase( 0 specific universal techni1ue that suits every practitioner is a myth since individuals differ (idely in personality, psychology, and learning speed. 5o(ever, there is a relatively easy universal algorithm, or procedure, that accounts for the characteristics of each person and allo(s for the most rational, effective (ay to attain the initial phase entrances. This algorithm encompasses cyclic practicing of the indirect techni1ues covered in this chapter. -ithout e$ception, these techni1ues # despite their varying degrees of difficulty # are suitable for every practitioner (ho (ishes to e$perience the phase. Results can be e$pected immediately follo(ing the first fe( attemptsI ho(ever, to achieve measurable results, an average of five daily, conscious attempts must be made. Ma!ing more than five attempts over the course of a day is fine, too. There is nothing difficult to understand about performing the techni1ues since they are clearly laid out and based on real internal processes. Re$ar+a"ly, due to correctly practiced indirect techni4ues, $ore than half of students at the live school attain phase entrance after only t&o days(

Interesting Fact! Many e#perienced practitioners prefer to "ypass the effort associated &ith direct techni4ues and hone their s+ills through the sole use of indirect techni4ues( In order to ensure that oneDs efforts are most fruitful and productive, (e are going to individually e$amine each step and principle behind the actions in great detail. /et us start from a description of the techni1ues themselves, (hich (ill actually apply practically &ust as much to direct techni1ues as to indirect techni1uesI as they only differ in character and length of application. There are plenty of techni1ues, so after practicing all of the indirect techni1ues presented in this chapter, a practitioner should be able to choose three or four of the most straightfor(ard, individually effective methods. 3eparation techni1ues (ill be e$amined later. They are completely different from usual techni1ues, (hich only bring one into the phase, but do not necessarily themselves lead to separation from the body. It is often also necessary to !no( ho( to stop perceiving oneDs physical body after employing these techni1ues. It is necessary to understand (hen to employ these techni1ues, and the importance of (a!ing from sleep (ithout opening the eyes or moving the body. 0ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon a(a!ening must be learned and practiced to mastery since it constitutes the main barrier to successful practice. 0fter e$amining the peripheral information surrounding indirect techni1ues, the cycles of indirect techni1ues (ill be e$amined, including (hat there are, ho( they (or!, and ho( they are best used. 3uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of performing these cycles. 5o(ever, there are e$ceptions, and it is not completely necessary to proceed (ith these cycles if oneEs o(n mind someho( hints (hat e$actly one should start from, (hich (e (ill also e$amine separately.

P:I,A:9 I+&I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES /ota Bene, The techni1ues described belo( are the simple components of indirect techni1ue cycles. Implementing each techni1ueDs description is far from effective. Of the list given belo(, it behooves the individual practitioner to choose the most comprehensible and interesting techni1ues, then actively study and apply the instructions for use. OBSE:?I+G I,AGES Testing Individual Effectiveness Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Observe the blan! space behind the eyes for 7 to ; seconds and try to locate recogni=able pictures, images, or symbols. If nothing appears during this e$ercise, the techni1ue should be substituted. If something appears, continue to passively observe the images. Mean(hile, the images (ill become increasingly realistic, literally enveloping the practitioner. 6o not aggressively e$amine the details

of the image, or it (ill vanish or change. The image should be e$perienced as a panorama, ta!ing everything in. Observe the images as long as the 1uality and realism increases. 6oing so yields t(o possible results+ the practitioner becomes part of the surroundings, and has achieved the phase, or the image becomes borderline or absolutely realistic, and separation from the physical body is possible. Training To train the use of this techni1ue, lie do(n in the dar!, eyes closed, and observe the blac!ness for several minutes, identifying any specific images that may arise from simple spots or floaters, and then gradually transition to (hole pictures, scenes, or scenarios. -ith practice, this techni1ue is very easy and straightfor(ard. 0 common mista!e made during practice of this techni1ue is (hen the practitioner aggressively attempts to con&ure images versus passively observing (hat is naturally presented. P8A+TO, )IGG<I+G @,O?E,E+TA Testing Individual Effectiveness Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Try to (iggle a part of the body for 7 to ; seconds, but (ithout using any muscles. If nothing moves during the attempt, try a different techni1ue. If a sensation of (iggling occurs, even in the slightest, continue to employ the techni1ue, striving to increase the range of movement as much as possible. This techni1ue should be performed very aggressively, not passively. 0s soon as the range of movement nears or e$ceeds four inches # (hich may ta!e &ust several seconds # the follo(ing situations may arise+ one momentarily finds oneself someho( in the phase, or the (iggled part of the body begins to move freely. The occurrence of movement during practice of this techni1ue allo(s the practitioner to transition to a separation techni1ue and attempt to leave the body.

-hile practicing phantom (iggling, strong vibrations may occur, amid (hich separation may be attempted. 3ounds also often arise, allo(ing the opportunity to practice listening in, (hich can lead to phase entrance. The phantom (iggling techni1ue is not meant to produce an imagined movement by a phantom body. The point of the techni1ue is to attempt the movement of a physical body part (ithout using muscular action. That is, the focus should rest upon an internal intention of movement (ithout physical action. -hen the sensation occurs, it differs little from its real counterpart and is often accompanied by heaviness and resistance. 2enerally, there is very little range of movement at first, but (ith concentrated effort the range of movement noticeably increases. It does not matter (hich part of the body is used to e$ercise phantom movement. It may be the (hole body or &ust one finger. 'either is the speed of the movement important. Increased range of perceived movement is the aim of the techni1ue. Training To train the techni1ue of phantom (iggling, rela$ a hand for several minutes (hile lying do(n, eyes closed. Then, aggressively envision the follo(ing hand movements, (ithout moving any muscles, for t(o to three minutes each+ rotating, up#do(n, left#right, e$tending the fingers and dra(ing the fingers together, clenching and unclenching a fist. 'o sensations (ill occur at first. 2radually, the sensation of muscular action (ill become so apparent that the perceived movement (ill be indistinguishable from real movement. 6uring the first training attempts, practitioners are often tempted to open their eyes to see if actual movement is occurring H thatDs ho( real the sensation feels. <ISTE+I+G I+ Testing Individual Effectiveness

Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. 6o this for 7 to ; seconds (ithout moving and (ithout opening the eyes. If nothing happens during this period of time, s(itch to another techni1ue. If any sounds li!e bu==ing, humming, raving, hissing, (histling, tin!ling, or melodies occur, listen attentively. -ith results, the sound (ill increase in volume. /isten in as long as there is some dynamism in the volume of the sound. -hen the sound stops, or the noise becomes loud enough, a separation techni1ue may be attempted. 3ometimes, the noise itself thro(s one into the phase (hile listening. 0t a certain stage, sounds may be e$tremely loud and have even been described as comparable to the roar of a &et#engine. The action of listening in consists of actively and attentively e$ploring a sound, the (hole of its tonality and range, and ho( it reacts to the listener. There is an optional techni1ue !no(n as forced listening in, (here it is simply necessary to strongly (ant to hear noise, and mean(hile ma!e intuitive internal efforts, (hich, as a rule, are correct. Performed correctly, forced sounds (ill intensify the same (ay as those perceived (ith the standard listening in techni1ue. Training In order to practice listening in, lie do(n in a silent place, eyes closed, and listen for sounds originating in the head. These attempts are usually cro(ned (ith success (ithin several minutes of trying, and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely everyone has (ithin. One simply has to !no( ho( to tune in to it. :OTATIO+ Testing Individual Effectiveness Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Imagine the physical body is rotating along an a$is for ; to 1A seconds. If no unusual sensations occur, try another techni1ue. If vibrations occur during rotation or the movement suddenly feels

realistic, then continue the rotation techni1ue as long as there is progress in the sensationDs development. There are several possible outcomes (hen rotation is practiced. The imagined rotation is replaced by a very real sensation of rotating along an imagined a$is. -hen this occurs, a practitioner may easily leave the body. The other outcome is the sudden presence of strong vibrations or loud sounds, amid (hich separation from the body is possible. 6uring rotation, separation has been !no(n to spontaneously occur and the practitioner enters the phase. Training To practice rotation, imagine revolving around the head#to#foot a$is for several minutes (hile lying do(n, eyes closed. It is not necessary to focus on the visual effects of rotation or minute sensations in the body. The !ey factor is the vestibular sensation that arises from internal rotation. 0s a rule, many practitioners e$perience difficulty performing full rotation. One person may be limited to @A degrees of movement (here another e$periences 1?A degrees. -ith consistent, correct practice, full 7<A degree rotation (ill occur. 2O:CE& 2A<<I+G AS<EEP Testing Individual Effectiveness Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Picture a s(ift, compulsory fall into sleep for ; to 1A seconds, and then return to (a!efulness, follo(ed by an aggressive attempt at separating from the physical body. 2enerally, after performing this techni1ue, the practitionerDs state of mind 1uic!ly transitions bet(een different states of brain. 3trong vibrations often occur (hen emerging from this "pseudo#sleep%, (here the li!elihood of separation from the body is increased, accompanied the opportunity to practice other techni1ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e$ercise. In essence, forced falling asleep is a tric! on the mind designed to ta!e advantage of the brainDs refle$ive responses to actions that immediately induce semi#conscious states that allo( easy entrance

into the phase. ,mploying it is especially effective upon an e$tremely alert a(a!ening, or after a movement is unintentionally made upon a(a!ening. 9orced sleep is 1uite simple. It re1uires a cessation of internal dialogue, shifting mental focus a(ay from e$ternal stimuli, and a strong desire for a 1uic! reentrance to the sleeping state follo(ed by rene(ed (a!efulness after several seconds. In order to understand ho( this is done, it is sufficient to recall ho( one had urgently made oneself fall asleep before, or ho( one had fallen asleep after having been e$hausted, or after a long period of sleep deprivation. 0 common mista!e in practice occurs (hen people fall asleep after attempting the techni1ue, forgetting the necessary desire to 1uic!ly return to consciousness. SECO+&A:9 I+&I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES ST:AI+I+G T8E B:AI+ Testing Individual Effectiveness Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Ma!e ) to 7 s1uee=es straining the brain. This is !no(n as straining the brain. If nothing happens, try another techni1ue. If vibrations occur during this e$ercise, try to move the vibrations around the body and amplify them by continuing to strain the brain. The stronger the vibrations, the higher the probability that a separation techni1ue may be applied. 3pontaneous separation may occur. -hile straining the brain, a practitioner may e$perience the sounds necessary for transitioning to a listening in techni1ue. The vibrations that arise from straining the brain are very stri!ing. If there is any doubt as to (hether the vibrations happened, then most li!ely a practitioner did not e$perience them. The vibrations may be described as an intense, painless electrical current moving through or gripping the body. 0t times, the sensation of a total numbing of the body is e$perienced.

Training To practice straining the brain, lie do(n, eyes closed, and attempt to strain the brain. 6o not thin! about the fact that actually s1uee=ing the brain is impossible. The imagined straining should be spasmodic, rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire brain or specific parts of it. 6uring the process, a sensation of pressure or even real strain arises in the brain. -ith @;J of practitioners, this strain usually occurs (ithin the first fe( minutes of e$ercise. This techni1ue should be committed to memory (hen training so that it may be instantly recalled and practiced upon a(a!ening from sleep. Practitioners often ma!e the mista!e of unintentionally straining their facial and nec! muscles instead of straining the interior of their heads. This error should be avoided at all costs, lest it become a habit that frustrates genuine practice. ST:AI+I+G T8E BO&9 )IT8O5T 5SI+G ,5SC<ES Testing Individual Effectiveness This techni1ue involves straining the (hole body and differs little from straining the brain. -hen a(a!ening from sleep, ma!e one to three attempts at straining the (hole body, refraining from actually fle$ing any physical muscle. If nothing happens, try another techni1ue. 8ibrations may occur as a result, and amplifying these by straining the body (ithout using muscles can induce a spontaneous separation from the body. -hen the vibrations become strong enough, attempt a separation techni1ue. 3ounds often arise during the vibration (hich allo( for listening in and a subse1uent entrance to the phase. Training To practice+ (hile lying do(n, eyes closed, try to strain the entire body (ithout using physical muscles for several minutes. Tingling, internal pressure, and a strain on the brain often occur during this e$ercise. Remember to avoid straining any real muscles. If physical

strain occurs, results may be forfeited in the critical moment of fruition. ?IS5A<IBATIO+ Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or three to five seconds, con&ure an intense desire to see and literally create a specific ob&ect. The ob&ect should be envisioned at rest, about four to eight inches from the practitioner. /imit the visuali=ation to simple, familiar ob&ects, li!e an apple, flo(er, sphere, or hand. 3ometimes it is useful to imagine an ob&ect floating &ust above the eyebro(s instead of directly in front. If nothing appears during this period of time, a different techni1ue should be used. If an ob&ect appears, one should !eep loo!ing hard at it, and at a certain moment one (ill reali=e that one is already standing ne$t to it some(here in the (orld of the phase. -hen the ob&ect becomes realistic, one can also try to separate from oneDs body on oneDs o(n. SE+SO:9-,OTO: ?IS5A<IBATIO+ Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Imagine active, physical movement for 1A to 1; seconds (hile touching an actual ob&ect and simultaneously e$amining the imagined details of the room. If nothing appears during this period of time, a different techni1ue should be used. If real and imagined sensations become mi$ed, then continue the practice until the imagined sensations overcome the primary senses. I,AGI+E& ,O?E,E+T Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or ; to 1A seconds, concentrate on visuali=ing any of the follo(ing actions+ (iggling, (al!ing, running, somersaulting, pulling a rope, or s(imming. Try to imagine the movement as a realistic and active event during the practice period. If nothing happens, a

different techni1ue should be employed. If results occur in the form of the sensation of mobility, the imagined movement should be continued until it becomes the dominant sensation. -hen the movement achieves primacy, it is accompanied by translocation to the phase. If such a translocation does not automatically occur, a separation techni1ue is recommended. I,AGI+E& SE+SATIO+S Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or three to five seconds, envision that a specific ob&ect is being held in the hand. If nothing happens, a different techni1ue should be practiced. If the impression of shape and (eight become apparent, concentrate harder on the sensation, trying to compound the e$perience. Once the ob&ectDs presence in the hand achieves a realistic 1uality, separation is possible. 5o(ever, it is preferable to continue handling the ob&ect. 0 practitioner is free to imagine any type of ob&ect that fits in the hand. ,$amples include a telephone, a drin!ing glass, a remote control, a ball, a pen, or a bo$. I,AGI+E& SO5+&S pon a(a!ening, (ithout moving or opening oneDs eyes, one should actively try to hear a specific sound or (ord, e.g. someoneDs name or a melody. If nothing happens, the techni1ue should be changed for another one. If sound arises, one should try to listen in to it. -hen it pea!s in volume, one may try to separate. E9E ,O?E,E+T Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. Perform t(o to five sharp left#right or up#do(n eye movements. If nothing happens, the techni1ue should be e$changed for another. If vibrations occur, separation may be attempted after efforts to intensify the vibrations.

&OT O+ T8E 2O:E8EA& Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or three to five seconds, visuali=e a point in the middle of the forehead. If nothing happens, a different techni1ue should be used. If vibrations occur, they may be intensified by using this techni1ue or by straining the brain, facilitating separation from the body. 0lso, sounds may arise that allo( the practice of listening in. 2EA: ,ET8O& Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or three to five seconds, imagine something horrific and graveyard#related staying nearby, something graphic, macabre, out of the (orst nightmare imaginable. If nothing happens, a different techni1ue should be employed. 5o(ever, acute fear may occur, most li!ely forcing the practitioner into the phase (here a separation techni1ue may be applied. 0lternatively, vibrations or noise may arise and allo( the use of other indirect techni1ues. 0 common problem (ith the use of this techni1ue is that fear often ma!es the practitioner so uncomfortable in the phase that he desires nothing else than to return to (a!efulness. :ECA<<I+G T8E P8ASE STATE Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or three to five seconds, recall the sensations that accompanied a previous phase e$perience. FThis only (or!s if the practitioner has achieved phase entrance in the past.G ,ither nothing (ill happen and a different techni1ue should be used or these sensations (ill be recalled and separating from the body may be tried # if it doesnDt occur spontaneously. 8ibrations or noise may also arise during this techni1ue, in (hich case listening in or straining the brain may be practiced.

B:EAT8I+G CO+CE+T:ATIO+ Immediately after (a!ing from sleep, remain motionless, eyes closed. 9or three to five seconds, focus on breathingI the rise and fall of the rib cage, the inflation and deflation of the lungs, the inta!e and escape of air. If no results occur, a different techni1ue should be used. If vibrations, noise, or spontaneous separation occur, the practice of this techni1ue should be intensified and used to its full advantage. SE<ECTI+G T8E :IG8T TEC8+I=5ES The ne$t step to mastering indirect techni1ues is choosing the right techni1ues that suit individual predispositions. There is no point in going for one techni1ue or another only because they loo! interesting and because someone (rote a lot or spo!e a lot about them. The choice should be based strictly upon (hat suits an individual practitioner. Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni1ues, practically only straining the brain (or!s easily and 1uic!ly for @;J of practitioners. 0ll other techni1ues (or! immediately for only about );J to ;AJ of practitioners during initial training. 5o(ever, after several training sessions, each techni1ue yields results for >;J of engaged practitioners. One (ay or another, every practitioner should identify a certain set of techni1ues that (or!s best. 0 set should consist of no less than three techni1uesI four or five is even better to allo( more options and practical combinations. 'on#(or!ing techni1ues should not be discarded (holesale by the individual because they afford an opportunity to achieve success through ne(, previously unresponsive e$periences. To ensure the correct selection of techni1ues, each should be separately practiced over a period of at least three days. To this end, one should e$periment (ith each of the primary techni1ues for ) to

1A minutes before falling asleep, or even during the day. It is good to choose at least one secondary techni1ue practice. This regimen allo(s a precise determination of the techni1ues that (ill yield the best results for the practitioner. 6uring the process of selecting personali=ed techni1ues, a practitioner learns and retains the techni1ues in an intimate, personal (ay, (hich positively affects ho( techni1ues are used during critical moments. It is (orth noting that the final selection of techni1ues should be varied. 9or e$ample, choosing both straining the brain and straining the body (ithout using muscles is pointless because they are practically one and the same. More often than not, they (ill both either (or! or not (or!. This is (hy techni1ues should involve various types of sensory perception+ visual, audio, !inesthetic, vestibular, imaginary sense perception, and internal strain. Remember that priorities and goals change (ith time, and that a techni1ue that fell flat during initial attempts may une$pectedly prove valuable later on. 4e fle$ible. 'o set of techni1ues should be carved in stone. In fact, the set may change several times over the first fe( (ee!s as the practitioner discovers (hat produces the best individual results. To close this section, a list has been provided, detailing the most effective indirect techni1ues. This list (as compiled (ith classroom data from the 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel and may prove helpful in determining an effective set of indirect techni1ues. The ,ost Effective Indirect Techni$ues at School of Out-ofBody Travel Se(inars Observing Images 1;J Phantom -iggling 1;J /istening in 1;J Rotation 1AJ 3training the 4rain ;J 3training the 4ody -ithout sing Muscles ;J 9orced 9alling 0sleep ;J Mi$ture of Techni1ues 1AJ

Other Techni1ues SEPA:ATIO+ TEC8+I=5ES

)AJ

/et us begin (ith a totally shoc!ing fact+ during one#third of successful indirect entries into the phase, it is not necessary to perform any specific phase entry techni1ues, as separation techni1ues are immediately successfulM This has been statistically proven at 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel seminars and in the analyses of other sources. *onversely, an incorrect understanding of separation techni1ues may lead to undesirable conse1uences. It is possible for a practitioner to enter the phase state and be unable to separate from the body. Therefore, it is very important to understand ho( separation techni1ues (or! since they are often a !ey to success. Interesting Fact! Relatively often, a practitioner &ill try to e$ploy separation techni4ues to no effect, ho&ever, he &ill later une#pectedly understand that he had "een lying in a different position than he sensed that he &as in, and in fact, it had only "een necessary for hi$ to stand up( This happens $ostly a$ong "eginners and is indicative of an incorrect understanding of separation techni4ues( 0t times a practitioner may only need to thin! about separation and it happens. This is a rarity, (hich e$plains the e$istence of a (hole series of au$iliary techni1ues. The most important separation techni1ues are rolling out, getting up, climbing out, and levitation. :O<<I+G O5T -hile a(a!ening, attempt to roll over to the edge of the bed or the (all (ithout using any muscles. 6onDt (orry about falling out of bed,

hitting the (all, or be concerned (ith the details of ho( this techni1ue should feel. Cust roll. GETTI+G 5P pon a(a!ening, attempt to get out of bed (ithout physical e$ertion. This should be performed in a (ay that is most comfortable for the practitioner. C<I,BI+G O5T -hile a(a!ening, try to climb out of the body (ithout using any muscles. This techni1ue generally comes to mind (hen a partial separation has been achieved through the use of other techni1ues, or one part of the body has completely separated. <E?ITATIO+ pon a(a!ening, attempt to levitate up(ard, parallel to the bed. -hile attempting to levitate, do not (onder ho( it should be accomplishedI everyone intuitively !no(s ho( to levitate from their e$periences in dreams. 2A<<I+G O5T Practically the same as levitation+ upon a(a!ening, try to sin! do(n through the bed. P5<<I+G O5T 5ere, upon a(a!ening, try to e$it the body through the head, as if escaping from a lidded cocoon. BAC>)A:&S :O<<

0fter a(a!ening, try to perform a bac!(ards somersault over the head (ithout using any physical muscles. B5<GE T8E E9ESC pon a(a!ening, bulge out or (iden the eyes (ithout opening them. 9rontal movement to(ard separation may result. 3eparation techni1ues are united by a singular idea+ nothing should be imagined, movement should be attempted (ithout the use of physical muscles. The techni1ues produce the same sensations of movement felt in real life. If nothing happens immediately after trying, then the techni1ue is not going to (or!, though it may deliver results at a later time. 0 practitioner (ill instantly be able to recogni=e if the techni1ue has (or!ed. 5o(ever, people are often unprepared for the realness of the sensations and thin! that they are ma!ing a physical movement instead of reali=ing that a part or all of the body has separated. 0fter this unfortunate failure, careful analysis helps to understand (hat happened and plan for a successful retry. If separation (as incomplete or too! place (ith some difficulty, this is a signal that the techni1ue is being performed correctly. 3trength and aggressive effort are re1uired from this point to achieve complete separation. 9or e$ample, if some movement began and then stopped after having made some progress, then one should go bac! and move even harder once again in the same direction. In order to practice separation techni1ues, lie do(n (ith the eyes closed and attempt all of them over the course of several minutes. 3eparation has li!ely been accomplished if no muscles t(itch or strain and a sensation of movement occurs. There (ill be a strong, almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a movement. 'aturally, no physical movement actually occurs and the practitioner remains prone and immobileI ho(ever, at the right moment, these actions (ill lead to an easy entrance into the phase. Interesting Fact!

%ppro#i$ately 17 to 87 of the ti$e that the phase is practiced, one reali*es i$$ediately upon a&a+ening that one has already separated( This $eans that one $ay already go so$e&here and stand, lie do&n, sit do&n, etc( This is not ho&ever "eco$ing conscious in a drea$, "ut an actually a&a+ening( T8E BEST TI,E TO P:ACTICE The !ey to practice is the 1uantity and 1uality of attempts made that hone a practitionerDs s!ills. There are several (indo(s of time best suited for employing indirect techni1ues. To begin, it should be stated that sleep follo(s a cyclical pattern. -e a(a!en every hour#and#a#half and then 1uic!ly fall asleep again, (hich gives rise to sleep cycles. 9urthermore, (e e$perience t(o primary stages of sleep+ rapid eye movement FR,MG sleep, and non# rapid eye movement F'R,MG sleep. 'R,M sleep includes many internal stages. The more (e sleep, the less the body needs deep 'R,M sleep, and the more time (e spend in R,M sleep. Phase entrance is most li!ely to occur during R,M sleep.

The best (ay to implement indirect techni1ues is by the deferred $ethod. The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep cycle during its

final stage and then disrupt it again after falling bac! to sleep, (hich ma!es sleep light during the rest of the sleep cycle. 3leep accompanied by fre1uent interruptions can be put to productive uses. 9or e$ample, if a practitioner FletDs call him Cac!G goes to sleep at midnight, then Cac! should set an alarm for < oDcloc! in the morning. pon a(a!ening, Cac! should engage in some sort of physical activity, li!e going to the bathroom, getting a drin! of (ater, or reading a fe( pages of this boo!. 0fter(ard, Cac! should go bac! to bed thin!ing about ho(, (ithin the ne$t t(o to four hours, he (ill (a!e up multiple times and ma!e an attempt to enter the phase during each a(a!ening. If Cac! goes to bed earlier, then his alarm cloc! should be set bac! by that amount of time, since si$ hours of initial sleep is the optimal length of time. If Cac! sleeps less than si$ hours, then the second half of his nightDs sleep (ill be too deep. If Cac! sleeps longer than si$ hours, then there (ill be little time remaining for attempts, or Cac! may not even be able to fall asleep. If a practitioner naturally (a!es up in a forceful manner, it (ill be difficult to regain sleep. Thus, it (ill not be necessary for the practitioner to get out of bed (ith the aid of an alarm. The practitioner should attempt to go right bac! to sleep. 'aturally, the deferred method is most applicable in cases (here it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires, (ithout having to (a!e up early. 'ot everyone en&oys such lu$ury on a daily basis, but nearly everyone has days off (hen time may be set aside to practice the deferred method. -t is in large $easure due to the deferred $ethod that classroo$ courses at the School of Out-of-Body Travel allo& up to 298 of class participants to enter the phase in the course of a single &ee+end, The second most effective (indo( of time for entering the phase is ordinary $orning a&a+ening( This generally occurs during light slumber follo(ing a full nightDs sleep. 0nother effective time to practice indirect techni1ues is after a(a!ening from a daytime nap. Once again, this type of sleep (ill be light and short, (hich provides the body needed rest (hile allo(ing

memory and intention to be !ept intact through the moment of a(a!ening. 0gain, not everyone has the lu$ury of ta!ing daytime naps, but if such a chance arises, then it (ould be very beneficial to ta!e advantage of the opportunity. /ightti$e a&a+enings are the least effective times for phase e$perimentation because the brain still re1uires a lot of deep sleep at this time. 0(a!ening at night, the mind is 1uite (ea! and hardly capable of any effort. ,ven if some results are observed, a(a!ening often ends (ith 1uic!ly falling bac! asleep. This is not to say that normal practice of the phase cannot occur at nightI it &ust (onDt be as effective as at other times. The nighttime option is best for those (ho lac! an opportunity to use other (indo(s of time for practicing the phase. nderstand that (e a(a!en at night every @A minutes, (hich is (hy a minimum of four a(a!enings is almost guaranteed (hen sleeping, even for &ust si$ hours. -hen the practitioner !no(s about this and strives to sei=e those moments, (ith time he (ill actually sei=e them and ta!e advantage of them. CO+SCIO5S A)A>E+I+G :onscious a&a+ening is (a!ing up (ith a particular thought in mindI ideally, a thought about indirect techni1ues. In order to start using indirect techni1ues upon a(a!ening, it is not sufficient to have a cursory !no(ledge of the techni1ues to be used (hen (a!ing. 6ue to the peculiarities of the human mind and its habits, it is not al(ays easy (hen (a!ing to recall any particular motive or idea. The goal of conscious a(a!ening is to practice instant action (ithout being idle after (a!ing up. Interesting Fact! There e#ists a "elief that the pheno$enon of outof-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is accessi"le only to an elect fe& through practices that re4uire secret +no&ledge( 0o&ever, the

greatest difficulty &hen trying to e#perience out-of"ody travel in a short period of ti$e lies only in i$$ediately re$e$"ering a"out the techni4ues upon a&a+ening &ithout $oving( This is all si$ple and straightfor&ard( But it is precisely this trifle that is the largest stu$"ling "loc+ &hen trying to e#perience such an unco$$on pheno$enon( This is not difficult at all for appro$imately );J of the population. 5o(ever, for the other three#1uarters of the population, this is an difficult barrier to entry that can even seem insurmountable. If such thoughts arise, one should simply understand that this cannot be so, and that persistent attempts and training are the !ey solution. The reasons (hy people are unable to remember practicing the phase upon a(a!ening are+ not being in the habit of immediately doing anything upon a(a!ening, a desire to sleep longer, a desire to go to the bathroom, being thirsty, a desire to suddenly start solving day#to#day problems, and so on. *onscious a(a!ening (ith the intent of attempting an indirect techni1ue should be a practitionerDs primary goal, (hich should be pursued at every cost. The speed at (hich the phase is learned and e$perienced depends on this. There are several effective tric!s to learning conscious a(a!ening+ -ntention upon falling asleep' This is the very important to successfully achieving conscious a(a!ening. 0 very clear scientific fact has been proven by somnologists Fscientists (ho study sleepG+ upon a(a!ening, people usually thin! about (hat they had been thin!ing about before falling asleep. This phenomenon is easy to observe if the sleeper is e$perience a serious life problemI they fall asleep (ith the problem and (a!e (ith it. 3o, in a case li!e this, if difficulties at the front of the mind are replaced (ith a desire to practice the phase, this (ill produce the desired effect. It is not necessary to thin! solely about conscious a(a!ening (hile falling asleep. It is sufficient to simply affirm the intention clearly and

distinctly, even state the intention out loud. Practicing these types of conscious actions (hile entering sleep (ill do much to promote the success of indirect techni1ues upon a(a!ening. ;eneral intent' The more clearly a practitioner concentrates on the importance and necessity of (a!ing up and immediately remembering to practice the techni1ues, the more solid the intent (ill become, and the more li!ely the process (ill fulfill its role and actually lead to results. %ffir$ing desires' 3ometimes an internal intention is simply not enough for some people, or they are unable to properly affirm one by virtue of individual characteristics. In this case, an affirmation of desires should be introduced at the physical level. This could be in the form of a note (ith a description of a goal placed ne$t to the bed, under oneDs pillo(, or hung on the (all. It could be a conversation (ith friends or family about the particular desire, or by repeatedly vocali=ing the actions that need to be performed upon a(a!ening. It could even be an entry in a diary, blog, or te$ting on a mobile phone. %naly*ing unsuccessful a&a+enings( 0naly=ing unsuccessful attempts at conscious a(a!ening is e$tremely important. -hen remembering the failed attempt after several minutes, several hours, or even later in the day, focus on it and resolve to succeed during the ne$t attempt. 6eep e$ploration of the failure is highly effective and practical since the practitioner is learning (hat (or!s, (hat doesnDt (or!, and ma!ing healthy resolutions to(ard success. :reating $otivation' The greater the desire to enter into the phase to accomplish a goal there, the 1uic!er successful conscious a(a!ening is achieved. Motivation is be created by a great desire to do or e$perience something in the phase. In general, previous visits to the phase are great motivation, but an uninitiated person does not !no( it and (ill need something to (hich they can relate. 9or some, this could be a childhood dream of flying to Mars, for others it could be the opportunity to see a loved one (ho has passed a(ay, for another it could be the chance to obtain specific information, or influence the course of a physical illness, and so forth.

0side from natural methods to achieve conscious a(a!ing, there are various devices and tools that facilitate a measure of success. These (ill be covered in *hapter ; in the section describing non# autonomous (ays of entering the phase. The "est $o$ent for conscious a&a+ening is &hile e#iting a drea$( This is the $ost effective and productive ti$e to atte$pt separation or perfor$ing the techni4ues( 0t this moment, physical a(areness of the body is at a minimum. 0(areness at the very end of a dream often occurs after nightmares, painful e$periences in the dream, falling dreams H any dream that causes a sudden a(a!ening. -ith time, one should develop a refle$ that enables one to perform planned actions at the moment of a(a!ening, but (hen consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of refle$ is highly beneficial to sei=ing the most fruitful of opportunities to enter the phase. 6ue to various psychological and physiological factors, it is not possible for every person to achieve conscious a(a!ening after every sleep cycle. Thus, there is no point in becoming upset if conscious a(a!ening does not occur every time. ,$periencing only ) to 7 a(a!enings per day is normalI this is sufficient enough to attempt phase entrance ) to ; times per (ee! (hen practiced daily. It is not (orth getting carried a(ay (ith an e$cessive number of attempts. 6uring the 3choolDs courses, it has been noted that doing 1A conscious a(a!enings or more Fsome students try )A or even 7AG over the course of one night and morning rarely yields results. This is due to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal that is desired so much that its reali=ation brea!s the natural rhythms of the body, one deprives oneself of the intermediate, transitional states that ma!e the phase effective. 0 practitioner may also 1uic!ly become emotionally e$hausted from the large number of attempts and be unable to push limits in the right direction. The upside is that one (ill simply tire out. If that starts to happen, it is better to calm do(n and try to approach the matter in a more rela$ed manner, evenly and gradually. A)A>E+I+G )IT8O5T ,O?I+G

0longside remembering the phase immediately upon (a!ing, another important re1uirement is a(a!ening (ithout moving, (hich is difficult since many people (a!e up and move. pon a(a!ening, scratching, stretching, opening the eyes, and listening to real sounds should be avoided. 0ny real movement or perception (ill very 1uic!ly disintegrate the intermediate state and introduce reality, the activation of the mind and its connection to the sensory organs. 0t first, a(a!ening (ithout moving seems difficult or even impossible. 5o(ever, it has been proven that this is remedied for through active attempts and the desire to achieve set goals. People often claim that they cannot a(a!en (ithout moving, that itDs an impossible e$perience. 5o(ever, after several attempts, it (ill happen, and it (ill occur more and more fre1uently (ith practice. Thus, if there is difficulty in a(a!ening (ithout movement, do not despair, &ust !eep trying. 3ooner or later, the body (ill yield to the practice, and everything (ill happen smoothly. 0(a!ening (ithout moving is very important because, for the ma&ority of people, e$periments (ith the phase are not possible e$cept in the first (a!ing moments (here (a!ing (ithout moving sets the stage for successful indirect techni1ue cycles. Often, a practitioner (ill ma!e 1A unsuccessful attempts and move (hile a(a!ening. Once the practitioner learns to consistently (a!e calmly and gradually, success 1uic!ly follo(s. 5o(ever, if an a(a!ening is conscious, but (ith movement, that does not mean that the practitioner cannot immediately ma!e an attempt to fall into the phase. 3uch attempts, although they (ill be about ; times less effective than usual, should nevertheless be made 0ny opportunity to practice (hile (a!ing should not be (asted. It must only be !ept in mind that one must first neutrali=e the effects of the movement in order to once again fall into an intermediate state. In the case of movement, it is e$tremely helpful to begin practice (ith forced falling asleep. /istening in also (or!s (ell, as does observing images and phantom (iggling, each performed passively for ;#1;

seconds, instead of the standard duration of 7 to ; seconds. 0fter performing these, cycling may begin. 0(a!ening (ithout movement, despite all its importance, is not a goal in and of itself, and also not (orth suffering over. -hen a(a!ening, if there is great discomfort, something itches, a need to s(allo( arises, or any manner of natural refle$, it is better to deal (ith it and then act according to practices recommended (hen movement upon a(a!ening happens. 'ot all movements upon a(a!ening are real and, if only for this reason alone, (hen movement occurs, indirect techni1ues should follo(. Interesting Fact! <p to 2 7 of sensations and actions that happen upon a&a+ening are not real as they see$, "ut are phanto$( 9alse sensations occur in (idely diverse (ays. People often do not understand (hat is going on (ith them (ithout having e$perienced the phase. 9or e$ample, a person may thin! they are scratching their ear (ith their physical hand (hen they are really using a phantom hand. 0 person may hear pseudo#sounds in the room, on the street, or at the neighborDs (ithout noting anything unusual. Or, a person may loo! around the room (ithout !no(ing that their eyes are actually closed. If a practitioner recogni=es such moments for (hat they are, they may immediately try to separate from the body. C9C<ES O2 I+&I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES Thus far, indirect techni1ues used for phase entrance and techni1ues for separation in the phase have been covered. *onscious a(a!ening and the best times to practice it have also been e$amined. 'o(, a specific algorithm of action for indirect techni1ues (ill be presented. 9ollo(ing this algorithm promises 1uic! and practical results.

0lgorithm of 0ction upon 0(a!ening+

!D Testing Se aration Techni$ues 7ithin * Seconds /i!e the previous observation of separation techni1ues, a third of successful attempts (ith indirect techni1ues yield immediate success upon the attempt of a separation techni1ue due to the fact that the first seconds after (a!ing up are the most useful for entering the

phase. The less time that has elapsed after a(a!ening, the better. *onversely, if one lies do(n e$pecting something to happen, chances 1uic!ly dissipate. Thus, upon a(a!ening, preferably (ithout first moving, a practitioner should immediately try various separation techni1ues, li!e rolling out, getting up, or levitation. If a techni1ue suddenly started to yield results for appro$imately for ; seconds, then separation from the body should be attempted. 3ometimes inertia, difficulty, or a barrier (ill arise during a separation attempt. 'o attention should be given to these problems. Instead, resolve to separate # decidedly and aggressively climb out of the body. Beep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon a(a!ening is a s!ill of the utmost importanceI one that is (orth honing from the very beginning, never forgotten. #D The Cycle of Indirect Techni$ues to 5se if One is 5nable to Se arate If separation does not occur after several seconds, it most li!ely means that separation (ill not occur, regardless of elapsed time in effort. This is (here the practitioner must resort to other techni1ues. The practitioner should already have chosen a minimum of three primary or secondary techni1ues that suit a practical repertoire. 5ere is (here the techni1ues are put into action. /ota Bene, -n order to give a specific e#a$ple, &e &ill e#a$ine the use of three specific techni4ues, &hich should "e replaced &ith a tested and chosen set of techni4ues( The follo(ing operational techni1ues have been used as e$amples+ observing images FaG, phantom (iggling FbG, and listening in FcG. 0fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating, the practitioner immediately starts observing the void behind the eyes. If images begin to appear (ithin 7 to ; seconds, observation should continue (ithout scrutini=ing the images in detail, or the image (ill evaporate. 0s a result of this action, the image (ill 1uic!ly become more and more realistic and colorful, engulfing the practitioner. If everything comes together correctly, a sudden translocation into the picture (ill

occur, or, (hen the picture becomes very realistic, attempt to separate from the body. If nothing happens after 7 to ; seconds, then the practitioner should transition to the techni1ue of phantom (iggling. 9or 7 to ; seconds, the practitioner 1uic!ly searches the entire body for a part that can be (iggled. Or, the entire period of time is spent in an attempt to (iggle a specific body part+ a finger, hand, or leg. If the desired effect occurs, then the practitioner should continue (ith the techni1ue and achieve the ma$imum possible range of movement. 6uring this process, a number of things can happen, including spontaneous separation, a successful separation attempt, free movement of the (iggled part, or the presence of sound or vibrations. 0ll of these events are of great advantage. If nothing (iggles over the course of 7 to ; seconds, then the practitioner should move on to listening in. The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. If the sound is there, listen and try to amplify it. 0s a result, the noise may gro( into a roar and spontaneous separation (ill occur, separating through the use of a techni1ue (ill be possible, or vibrations (ill occur. If no noise occurs over the course of 7 to ; seconds, then the entire cycle should be repeated. It is beneficial to e$amine the reason behind the use of a set of three indirect techni1ues. This is motivated by the fact that the body often reacts to techni1ues in very peculiar (ays. -ith one person, a techni1ue may (or! one day and not (or! on another day, (hich is (hy if only one techni1ue is used, even a very good techni1ue that (or!s often, a practitioner can miss out on a lot of different e$perience through the lac! of variety in practice. Thus, a practical repertoire should consist of several techni1ues. Interesting Fact! So$eti$es, the first techni4ue that &or+s for a practitioner never results in a repeat of phase entrance again, although other techni4ues that &ere not i$$ediately effective at the novice stages

of practice later "egin to &or+ regularly and successfully( %D :e eating the Cycle of Indirect Techni$ues If the first cycle of 7 techni1ues does not yield any clear results, this does not mean that all is lost. ,ven if the techni1ues do not (or!, they still dra( the practitioner closer to the phase state and it is simply necessary to continue using the techni1ues by again observing pictures, phantom (iggling, and listening in H and repeating this process at least three times. 5aving performed one cycle of techni1ues, one can easily go on to doing a second cycle, a third one, a fourth one, and so on. It is 1uite probable that during one of these cycles, a techni1ue (ill suddenly prove itself, even though it had not been (or!ing at all &ust a fe( seconds beforehand. 0 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of : cycles. The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically difficult to do something that has sho(n itself not to (or!, and one may give up ta!ing further action, even though one could be at the cusp of falling into the phase. Beep trying, and then try again, and again! There have been cases (here it too! t(enty cycles to produce results. 0 monumental effort, yes, but one (orth the outcome. 'D 2alling Aslee 7ith the Possibility of Trying AgainD If a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after performing cycles and attempts to separate, or even if everything (or!ed out, it is still better to go bac! to sleep to facilitate subse1uent attempts. 0gain, it is very important to go to sleep (ith a clearly defined intention of actually performing the cycles upon a(a!ening. 3uch intention vastly increases the probability that the ne$t attempt (ill occur soon. That is, one should not fall asleep (ith an empty head and the desire to simply get a good nightDs sleep. If using the deferred method, then clear intention is mandatory, as several attempts are possible over the course of a sleep cycle.

,ven if only a fe( attempts are made accompanied by decided and concentrated effort, then the four steps described in the algorithm (ill undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase. In order to more effectively use the system of indirect cycles, it is necessary to discuss (hat to do if one techni1ue (or!s and progress ceases during the cycle and phase entry does not occur.

9irst, understand that if a techni1ue has begun to (or!, only lac! of e$perience and s!ill (ill prevent the phase. 3econd, barriers are overcome by temporarily s(itching to other techni1ues. /et us suppose that noise arising (hen listening in gro(s louder and louder and then pea!s in volume. It (ould surely be beneficial to s(itch to forced falling asleep or observing images for several seconds, and then return to listening in. The sound may then become much louder and provide an opportunity to proceed (ith the techni1ue. 3ometimes, it ma!es sense to brea! off several times into various techni1ues and then return to the primary techni1ue that yielded some results.

It is often possible to simultaneously perform t(o or even three techni1ues and e$perience no negative effect to results. It is also normal and natural to s!ip around from techni1ue to techni1ue, deviating from a specific plan of action. 9or e$ample, sounds often arise during phantom (iggling. In this case, a practitioner may &ust simply s(itch over to listening in. Other oft#encountered results pairings are+ images from sound, sound from rotation, sound from straining the brain, a strain on the brain from listening in, vibrations from rotation, vibrations from phantom (iggling, and so forth. 3uring initial atte$pts at using cycles of indirect techni4ues, the pro"le$ of confusion during a critical $o$ent $ay arise, &hen a novice practitioner suddenly forgets e#actly &hat to do and ho& to do it( This is nor$al, and the solution is to i$$ediately do &hatever co$es to $ind( Results can "e achieved in this $anner( 5hen a practitioner is $ore rela#ed a"out the practice, such pro"le$s &ill no longer occur( 8I+TS 2:O, T8E ,I+& 8aried cycles of indirect techni1ues is an almost mandatory precondition for getting the best result. There are some e$ceptions. 3ometimes, through indirect indicators, a practitioner may be inclined to begin (ith certain techni1ues, regardless of (hat had been planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and the ability to use such cues plays an e$tremely important role in the use of indirect techni1ues because they enable a practitioner to substantially increase the effectiveness of practice. 8int +oD !C I(ages If the practitioner becomes a(are upon a(a!ening that some images, pictures, or remnants from dreams are before him, then he should immediately proceed to the techni1ue of observing images, (ith all of the results that arise from it. If this does not lead to anything, then cycling (ith a set of techni1ues should begin.

8int +oD #C +oises If the practitioner reali=es upon a(a!ening that he hears an internal noise, roaring, ringing, (histling, and so forth, then he should immediately begin from the techni1ue of listening in. If this has no effect, then cycles of indirect techni1ues ought to commence. 8int +oD %C ?ibrations If a practitioner feels vibrations throughout the body (hile a(a!ening, they should be amplified through the use of straining the brain or straining the body (ithout using muscles. -hen the vibrations reach their pea!, the practitioner can try to separate. If nothing happens after several attempts, indirect techni1ue cycles should start. 8int +oD 'C +u(bness If a practitioner (a!es to numbness in a body part, phantom (iggling of that part should be attempted. If no result is achieved after several attempts, cycling should be tried. Of course, it is better to refrain from techni1ues if the numbness is very intense and causes substantial discomfort. AGG:ESSIO+ A+& PASSI?IT9 6uring the practice of indirect techni1ues, including techni1ue cycles, unsuccessful attempts may result in falling asleep or becoming completely a(a!e. These results indicate a deficiency or e$cess of aggression. If a practitioner usually falls asleep (hile attempting to enter the phase, then more aggressive action is needed (hile performing indirect techni1ues. If, on the other hand, most attempts end in a full and alert a(a!ening, then aggression should be curbed and techni1ues should be conducted more slo(ly and in a more rela$ed manner. 4alance bet(een passivity and aggression is imperativeI the phase state is easily attained by those practitioners (ho find a stable medium bet(een passivity and aggression.

The issue of aggression re1uires a closer e$amination. =uite often, atte$pts at indirect techni4ues are $ade leisurely, &ithout desire or real effort, to >chec+ the$ off the list?( Results $ore easily reali*ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive desire to enter the phase( More often than not, practitioners lac+ aggressive desire, instead of having too $uch of it( Thus, each effort re4uires a distinct &ant to succeed( ST:ATEG9 2O: ACTIO+ 3ome mista!enly believe that indirect techni1ues (ill produce 1uic!, easy results, li!e a pill. 6espite the fact that the techni1ues described in this guideboo! are the best means to entering the phase, strong effort still needs to be e$erted. This is not important for some, as everything comes 1uite easily to them, but for others this is of great importance. Indirect techni1ues (ill definitely (or! if practiced consistently and as described. It has already been noted that in the ma&ority of cases, ma!ing several concentrated attempts upon a(a!ening (ithout movement is sufficient enough to produce results. It may ta!e a lot of time and effort to achieve phase entrance, so practitioners (ho set goals and (or! diligently (ill be presented (ith a cro(n of success. 0ttempts are important in large measure not only for the final result, but also for the process itself. 6uring practice, the practitioner independently learns and solves issues that may not have been understood in the guideboo!. Other times, the practitioner (ill encounter situations that have never been described at all. ItDs impossible to prepare a student for every possible scenario, so as a practitioner moves deeper into practice, a uni1ue, individual perspective and portfolio of e$periences develops, (hich (ill certainly prove useful in the future. ntil then, diligent practice of the information presented in this boo! (ill ready a practitioner for that personal frontier. 0ctions in practice re1uire strict attention. 3tudy the techni1ues and selects those that (or! best. 3et the goal of consistent, conscious

(a!ing (ithout movement. Ma!e an ob&ective of performing cycles of indirect techni1ues (hile (a!ing up, day in and day out. 5ith such a clear course of action, the practitioner should never defocus his attention or dissipate his energy on other related actions, li+e, for e#a$ple, on direct techni4ues for entering the phase( If the indirect techni1ues do not (or! in the course of several days, continue trying. The latest results occur in a matter of (ee!s, not months or years, li!e some sources maintain. 2oals are meant to be stubbornly pursued, step#by#step, firmly, and diligently. If no results occur after 1A to )A days, it is better to cease practice for a (ee! and ta!e a rest, and then return (ith a fresh resolve to master the practice. Interestingly enough, it is e$actly during such a brea! that spontaneous entrances into the phase through the most diverse methods occur. If success is still elusive even after 1 to ) months of trying, then a thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to root out any obvious mista!es or deficiencies. If overcoming them proves difficult or impossible, s(itching over to direct techni1ues is not recommended since they prove much more difficult than indirect techni1ues. Instead, techni1ues for entering the phase through conscious dreaming should be practiced. It is also not (orth s!ipping over problematic areas and trying to ma!e up for mista!es by e$pending even more effort. 9or e$ample, ignoring the precondition of a(a!ening (ithout moving (ill prove fruitless. 4ypassing this re1uirement (or!s for very fe( people. 9acing every problem head#on and (or!ing hard to brea! through (ill be richly re(arded (ith an unforgettable, treasured e$periences. Beep trying! T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )IT8 I+&I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES Internal certainty that nothing (ill happen instead of believing in positive results.

 3topping the performance of techni1ues after an unsuccessful cycle (hen a minimum of four cycles should be practiced. *onstantly a(a!ening to movement instead of remaining still. Performing direct techni1ues in the evening. Total concentration on indirect techni1ues is re1uired from the morning on if a practitionerDs goal is access to the phase. Performing indirect techni1ues for an e$tremely long period of time F) minutes or moreG. This is a complete (aste of time in most cases. 3(itching from techni1ues that have begun to (or! (hen practice should be follo(ed through to the end. Passively performing techni1ues instead of being determined and aggressive. Performing each techni1ue separately for too long a period of time, even if the techni1ue does not (or!, instead of s(itching to another techni1ue (ithin several seconds. ,$cessive thin!ing and analysis (hile performing indirect techni1ues, (hich re1uire mental tran1uility and inner stillness. 3topping and concentrating on unusual sensations (hen they arise versus continuing the techni1ue that brought them about in the first place. ,$tremely long anticipation upon a(a!ening instead of immediately performing techni1ues. Premature attempts at separating, instead of performing phase creation techni1ues through to the end of progress. 5olding the breath (hen unusual sensations appear. 4e calm instead. Opening the eyes (hen the only recommended movement is breathing or moving the eyes behind closed lids. 4eing agitated instead of rela$ed. *easing attempts to separate even (hen partial success is met. 3training the physical muscles (hile performing the techni1ues versus remaining physically motionless.

 'ot practicing after an alert a(a!ening, (hen techni1ues are best applied # especially in the event of (a!ing (ithout movement. Merely imagining the techni1ues instead of really understanding them and performing them, if, of course, one is not performing rotation or other imagined techni1ues. 3imply (iggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi$ed determination to increase the range of movement 9alling right asleep during forced falling asleep, instead of having the firm intention of continuing efforts (ithin only ; to 1A seconds. 3crutini=ing the details of images (hen using the techni1ue of observing imagesI the (hole image should be observed panoramically lest it disappear. Intentionally trying to force pictures (hen observing images, instead of loo!ing for (hat is naturally presented. 3imply hearing noise (hen employing the techni1ue of listening in, instead of attentively trying to pay attention, catch something, and listen in.

E-ercises for Cha ter #

=uestions 1. -hy are indirect techni1ues the easiest. ). -hy (ill one techni1ue (or! for some people and not for others. 7. 5o( many attempts are necessary in order to enter the phase. :. -hen observing images, should a picture be con&ured. ;. 5o( is phantom (iggling different from imagined movement. <. -here does sound come from (hile listening in. >. 5o( is forced listening in different from normal listening in. ?. -hen employing the techni1ue of rotation, should one try to rotate or simply imagine the rotation. @. -hat is physically strained (hen using the techni1ue of straining the brain.

1A. 5o( is straining the brain different from straining the body (ithout using muscles. 11. 3hould a practitioner fall asleep (hen using the forced falling asleep techni1ue. 1). 0ccording to statistics from classes held at the 3chool of Out# of#4ody Travel, (hich indirect techni1ues are the most effective. 17. -hy should one practice all of the primary techni1ues in a rela$ed state. 1:. -hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one#third of the time (hile using indirect techni1ues. 1;. Is levitation the most popular separation techni1ue. 1<. -hat is the essential difference bet(een indirect techni1ues and separation techni1ues. 1>. 5o( does the separation techni1ue of rolling out differ from the indirect techni1ue of rotation. 1?. Is it necessary to imagine anything (hile trying to separate. 1@. -hen is the best time to use indirect techni1ues. )A. *an techni1ues that are traditionally used upon a(a!ening be attempted during the day. 5o( effective are these techni1ues during the day. )1. Is becoming consciousness (hile dreaming the same as conscious a(a!ening. )). -hen employing indirect techni1ues, does an inability to a(a!en (ithout moving have an effect on oneEs practice. )7. -hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling indirect techni1ues. ):. -hat first step must be ta!en (hile cycling through indirect techni1ues. );. 5o( many different techni1ues should a cycle consist of. )<. -hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be practiced. )>. If a lot of time has passed after a(a!ening, is this good or bad for cycles of indirect techni1ues. )?. -hat must be done if a techni1ue gets stuc! at an unsatisfactory level of results.

)@. If the cycles do not (or!, (hat should be done. 7A. -hat are hints from the mind. 71. In (hat cases is it necessary to introduce aggressive effort (hen performing indirect techni1ues. Tasks 1. Try all of the primary indirect techni1ues (hile in a rela$ed state and single out 7 to ; techni1ues that seem to (or!. Repeat such training another couple of times on other days. ). Try all of the separation techni1ues in a rela$ed state. 7. 0chieve one conscious a(a!ening follo(ed by cycles of indirect techni1ues. :. 0chieve one conscious a(a!ening (ithout any physical movement and attempt an indirect techni1ue. ;. pon a(a!ening (ithout moving, perform a full cycle of indirect techni1ues, and repeat this e$ercise until phase entrance is achieved.

Cha ter % " &irect Techni$ues

T8E CO+CEPT O2 &I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES 3irect techni4ues for entering into an out-of-"ody e#perience are used &ithout the prere4uisite of sleep@ "y perfor$ing specific actions &hile lying do&n &ith the eyes closed( The advantage of direct techni1ues is that, in theory, they can be performed at any moment. 5o(ever, a large dra(bac! e$ists in the length of time it ta!es to master the techni1ues. Only ;AJ of practitioners achieve success after ma!ing daily attempts over a period of 7 to < (ee!s. 9or some, an entire year may pass before results are reali=ed. The difficulty in achieving results (ith direct techni1ues is not a problem of inaccessibility, but the natural psychological characteristics of the individual. 'ot everyone is able to clearly understand the specific nuances involved, (hich is (hy some (ill continually ma!e mista!es. Many practitioners strive to master direct techni1ues right a(ay because they appear to be the most convenient, straightfor(ard, and concrete techni1ues. 5o(ever, it is a grave mista!e to begin attempting and mastering phase entrance from this level. In @AJ of cases (here novices begin their training (ith direct techni1ues, failure is guaranteed. Moreover, a vast amount of time, effort, and emotion (ill be (asted. 0s a result, complete disillusionment (ith the entire sub&ect of phase e$periences is possible. 3irect techni4ues should only "e practiced after $astery of the easiest indirect techni4ues or ho& to "eco$e conscious &hen drea$ing( -n any case, difficulties &ill not &ear one do&n after&ards, as it &ill "e e#ceedingly clear fro$ oneAs o&n e#perience that the phase is not a fig$ent of the i$agination( %lso, an advanced

+no&ledge of indirect techni4ues &ill $a+e it considera"ly easier to achieve direct entry into the phase( Nuality of the phase e$perience is not dependent upon the chosen entrance techni1ue. 6irect techni1ues do not necessarily provide a deeper, more lasting phase over indirect techni1ues. 6irect techni1ues are better suited for some practitioners and not others, but this ban only be said for a minority of the practicing population. Mean(hile, indirect techni1ues are accessible to absolutely everyone all of the time. If a practitioner has decides to begin practice (ith direct techni1ues or has gained the necessary e$perience (ith indirect techni1ues, the underlying principles of the techni1ues must still be learned. -ithout these, nothing (ill occur, e$cept coincidentally and in rare cases. The !ey to the successful use of direct techni1ues rests in achieving a free#floating state of consciousness. 5o(ever, (e (ill first e$amine a large variety of very useful aspects and factors that ma!e direct entry into the phase much easier. 9irst, (e (ill e$amine (hen it is best to perform the techni1ues and ho( intensively to e$ercise their practice. Then, (e (ill e$amine the very important factor of body position, and the no less crucial issue of ho( long the techni1ues should be performed. Then, (e (ill briefly investigate the issue of rela$ation, and then (e (ill immediately move on to the actual direct techni1ues. Only after covering all of the above are (e able to delve into the issue of (hat a free#floating state of consciousness is and ho( to achieve it. T8E BEST TI,E TO P:ACTICE The issue of time is not important (ith indirect techni1ues since the ma&or prere1uisite is that they are performed immediately after a(a!ening occurs. In the case of direct techni1ues, the issue of timing is much more critical. 'aturally, the best method for finding the right time to perform direct techni1ues is the same as indirect techni1ues H the deferred $ethod. 5o(ever, there are some serious differences here. 9irst of

all, one may interrupt oneDs sleep at practically anytime of the night or early morning. 3econd, after having (o!en up F;#1; min.G, one should not fall bac! asleep, but should immediately proceed to the techni1ues. 6irect techni1ues are many times more effective (ith the deferred method than at any other time. This is due to the fact that (ith the deferred method, the mind does not have time to become 1AAJ alert, and it is easy to fall into the altered state of consciousness that (ill allo( results. -hen it comes to specific steps, one should a(a!en in the middle of the night either on oneEs o(n or (ith the help of an alarm cloc!. Then, one should get up and do something for 7 to 1A minutes, and then lie do(n again in bed and perform the techni1ues. If it is probable that the practitioner (ill (a!e up in too alert a state, and thus not even be sleepy, then the interval bet(een a(a!ening and performing the direct techni1ue should be shortened, and fe(er things should be done during that period of time. It should be noted that (ith this setup, a free#floating state of mind plays a far lesser role that (ith other procedures. The second most effective (indo( of time is "efore falling asleep at night, (hen the practitioner goes to bed. 6uring this period of time, the brain needs to shut do(n the body and mind in order to rene( its strength, (hich has been e$pended over the course of the day. This natural process can be ta!en advantage of by introducing certain ad&ustments to it. 0ttempts at performing direct techni1ues during the day are less effective. 5o(ever, if fatigue has already had a chance to build up by this time, this can be ta!en advantage of because the body (ill try to fall into sleep. This is especially suited for those (ho are accustomed to napping during the day. 2enerally, other (indo(s of time produce a substantially (orse result, (hich is (hy one should start (ith performing direct techni1ues in the middle of the night, or before a nightEs sleep. Only after such techni1ues have been mastered (ill it be possible to e$periment (ith daytime attempts.

I+TE+SIT9 O2 ATTE,PTS The degree of enthusiasm that is devoted to any pursuit is directly related to successfully reaching a goal. 5o(ever, it is very important to !no( (hen to ease up, especially (ith the delicate matter of phase entry. One attempt per day using a direct techni1ue is sufficient. If more attempts are made, the 1uality of each attempt (ill suffer considerably. Interesting Fact! Many approach direct techni4ues as if digging a ditch' the $ore - the faster and the "etter( The result' do*ens of atte$pts that yield no fruit( 0 lot of practitioners believe that do=ens of attempts over the course of a day (ill yield the phase. This is not the path to success and (ill 1uic!ly lead to disillusionment (ith the practice. ,ven if after a (ee! or a month no results are seen, direct techni1ues should be attempted only once daily. Persistent, analytical, and sensible, stubborn resolve to practice properly (ill produce the desired effect. &5:ATIO+ O2 A+ ATTE,PT It is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct techni1ue by lying in bed and resolving neither to sleep nor get up until the phase occurs. 3uch coarseness in handling delicate nature of the mind (ill produce nothing besides rapid emotional e$haustion. Rigid timeframes apply (hile performing direct techni1ues before a sleep or in the middle of the night. 6irect techni1ues attempts should only last 1A to )A minutes. /onger durations inhibit sleepiness because the mind (ill concentrate too long on the techni1ues, and the desire to fall asleep (ill dissipate, resulting in insomnia that often lasts several hours. Overdone efforts negatively affect natural

enthusiasm due lost sleep and being tired the follo(ing day, (hich is compounded by the reality of a gro(ing number of failed attempts. If direct techni1ues produce no effect over the course of 1A to )A minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night, then it is better to go to sleep (ith the thought that everything (ill (or! out another time. This is the positive outloo! a practitioner ought to al(ays maintain. BO&9 POSITIO+ -ith indirect techni1ues body position isnDt important since conscious a(a!ening regardless of body position is the goal. 5o(ever, the position of the body is crucial (hile practicing direct techni1ues. There is not an e$act body position that each practitioner should assume since, once again, individual characteristics and instincts differ (idely. There are specific rules that allo( one to select the right position, based on indirect indicators. Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse H lying on the bac! (ithout a pillo(, legs and arms straightened. This notion has probably been borro(ed from other practices claiming that it helps achieve an altered state of mind. 5o(ever, this position seriously impairs the efforts of the ma&ority of practitioners. The corpse pose should only be used (hen it is probable that a practitioner (ill 1uic!ly fall asleep (hile performing techni1ues in this pose, even though it generally prevents sleep. If a practitioner e$periences difficulty falling asleep and is constantly a(a!e (hile performing direct techni1ues, then the most comfortable position for the individual should be used. -f sleep co$es 4uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural position should "e ta+en( -f a practitioner e#periences fe&er gaps in consciousness &hen the techni4ues are perfor$ed and has a harder ti$e falling asleep, a $ore co$forta"le a position should "e used( 6epending on the situation, there are many possible positions+ lying do(n on the bac!, on the stomach, on the side, or even in a half#

reclined position. It is possible that a practitioner (ill have to change positions from one attempt to another, introducing ad&ustments related to a free#floating state of mind. :E<AEATIO+ 4y nature, one should clearly understand that direct techni1ues are in and of themselves rela$ation methods, inasmuch as no phase can occur (ithout one being rela$ed. 0ccordingly, one can go immediately into the phase (ithout any prior rela$ation. 3ince the most effective (indo( of time for using direct techni1ues occurs before sleep and at night, and lasts only 1A to )A minutes in any case, additional time should not be (asted on trying to rela$, nor should time for rela$ation be subtracted from the re1uisite 1A to )A minutes. *orrect and 1uality rela$ation is a difficult pursuit and many go about it individually, producing an opposition to natural rela$ation. 9or e$ample, many endeavor to rela$ their bodies to such a degree that in the end the mind is as active as it (ould be (hile trying to solve a difficult mathematical e1uation. In this type of situation, entering the phase is impossible. The body automatically rela$es (hen the mind is rela$ed. The body, in turn, (ill never rela$ if the mind is active. Therefore, it is better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the nuances of rela$ation and save their energies for more elementary matters. Instead of forcing a technical rela$ation, a practitioner should simply lie do(n for several minutes and this (ill provide the best rela$ation. /ying do(n activates natural rela$ation processesI the most po(erful !ind. *omplete, peaceful rela$ation may only be coerced by those (ith speciali=ed, in#depth e$perience. 2enerally, these are people (ho have spent a great amount of time and effort mastering trance and meditative states. Rela$ation in these cases should ta!e no more than 1 to 7 minutes and no longer as because (hen a practitioner is e$pert at rela$ation it is sufficient to &ust thin! about it, and it occurs.

0ll 1uality rela$ation techni1ues may (ell serve as direct techni1ues, if a free#floating state of mind occurs (hile they are e$ercised. 0fter gaining the necessary e$perience (ith trance and meditation, a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to mastering the phase. ?A:IATIO+S O2 5SI+G &I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES Techni1ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are e$actly the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only difference is in the method of implementation. The techni1ues are described in detail in *hapter ). 5o(ever, since direct techni1ues mostly re1uire passivity, not all techni1ues (or! e1ually (ell for both direct and indirect entries into the phase. 9or e$ample, active techni1ues li!e straining the brain cannot be used to gain a smooth entrance into the phase. 6irect techni1ues differ from indirect techni1ues in their implementation because of the slo(, halting production of results that occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end of it. If upon a(a!ening something happens to (or!, then this can practically al(ays lead to entrance into the phase. 9or e$ample, the same phantom (iggling before sleep can begin 1uic!ly enough, but range of movement (ill not be easy to increase, and the entire implementation of the techni1ue (ill rely on protracted, rhythmic movement. Results ta!e much longer+ ten minutes instead of ten seconds. These differences also apply to every techni1ue described in this guideboo!. /i!e the practice of indirect techni1ues, to begin the practice of direct techni1ues, a practitioner should choose 7 or : of the most suitable techni1ues from those that prove most effective to the individual. In order to assist the practitioner, a table has been provided, detailing the documented effectiveness of the direct techni1ues+

The ,ost Effective &irect Techni$ues at Se(inars of the School of Out-of-Body Travel Phantom -iggling 1;J Rotation 1;J /istening in 1;J 8ibrations Foccurring amid the use of other 1;J techni1uesG Observing Images 1AJ Mi$ture of Techni1ues 1AJ 3imple separation Fusually mi$ed in (ith other 1AJ techni1uesG Other Techni1ues 1AJ The primary difference in (or!ing (ith direct techni1ues is the time that it ta!es to e$ercise each. If testing a specific indirect techni1ue ta!es only 7 to ; seconds, then in this case several minutes (ill be spent. 6uration varies depending on certain factors. There are three primary (ays of performing the techni1ues+ classical, se1uencing, and cycling # similar to the cycling used (ith indirect techni1ues. To understand (hich variant should be used, consider the follo(ing table+ ?ariations of 5sing the )hen to 5se It Techni$ues :lassical Bpassive) variation' # (hen learning direct One attempt of 1 techni1ue. techni1uesI The techni1ue may be alternated # (hen a practitioner generally after each attempt. sleeps poorlyI # if attempts lead to (a!ing upI # if attempts (ith other variations occur (ithout lapses in consciousnessI # if the body and consciousness are in a rela$ed stateI

Se4uencing B$iddle)' One attempt (ith ) to 7 techni1ues for 1 to ; minutes. Techni1ues are alternated infre1uently. 0ggression fluctuates (ith the length of time that the techni1ues are performed. :ycling Bactive)' 0lgorithm of cycling 7 techni1ues li!e (ith indirect entry to the phase, but performing each techni1ue for 1A seconds to 1 minute, and not 7 to ; seconds.

# used if falling asleep occurs (hile using the classical variation, or if cycling results in becoming (ide a(a!eI # (hen a practitioner generally falls asleep 1uic!lyI # if the classical and se1uencing variations put one asleepI # (hen one generally falls asleep very 1uic!lyI # can also be employed (hen e$hausted or sleep deprivedI

0 practitioner should al(ays begin (ith the classical variation, i.e. using one techni1ue over an entire attempt. 6ue to the unusual nature of the efforts involved, a beginnerDs enthusiasm may sustain a completely alert state. /ater, ho(ever, strong, prolonged lapses of consciousness into sleep may occur. 5ere, it may be necessary to increase the level of activity by transitioning to the se1uencing variation. 3e1uencing is the primary variation used for direct techni1ues because of its elasticity in application. It can be passive if over the course of 1; minutes (hen a practitioner alternates t(o techni1ues for five minutes. It may also be aggressive if used se1uencing three techni1ues for one minute. ,verything bet(een these t(o e$tremes allo(s proper practice of the techni1ues and selection of the best variation to achieve a free#floating state of mind. If falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs even (ith the active form of se1uencing, then one should start cycling through indirect techni1ues, but performing each techni1ue from 1A seconds to 1 minute.

0s long (or! (ith the techni1ues is implied, one should not torment oneself if one does not (ant to do something, other(ise one may 1uic!ly tire out. ,verything should be a pleasure to do and not cause any e$cessive emotional tension. T8E 2:EE-2<OATI+G STATE O2 ,I+& There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry techni1ues offered in literature, stories, on the Internet, and at seminars. 3ometimes, one description fundamentally differs from another. In the ma&ority of cases, ho(ever, common threads e$ist that unite almost every description of a particular techni1ue+ short lapses in consciousness, memory gaps, and drifting in and out of sleep, all of (hich are hallmar!s of the free#floating state of mind. 0fter any of these phenomena occur, all manner of unusual pre#phase or phase sensations arise. /apses in consciousness may last for seconds, several minutes, or more than an hour. They may range from a simple loss of consciousness to entrance into a full#fledged dream. They may be singular and rare, or may occur several times over the course of a minute. -hatever a lapse entails, the mind attains a mode of operating that is ideal for phase e$perimentation, provided the practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and 1uic!ly return to a conscious, (a!ing state. 'ot every lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The lapse must have sufficient depth to be effective. Thus, (ith every unsuccessful lapse, another deeper lapse should be incurred.

The primary practical dra(bac! of the free#floating state of mind is the possibility of falling completely asleep during lapses instead of only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni1ues are definitely necessary to ensure the desired result. 3uch techni1ues more or less fulfill an au$iliary function, and thus one need not be strict about them. Interesting 2actF -t does not $atter &hich direct techni4ue is used@ as long as it leads to lapses in consciousness, success is possi"le( -hen performing the variations of the techni1ues, a practitioner can begin to vacillate bet(een full alertness and complete asleep, coming to, and then nodding off again. To avoid falling asleep re1uires a strong desire to return to (a!efulness. This is accomplished by a strong resolve on the part of the practitioner, even if, (hile performing a direct techni1ue, drifting in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmly assert that at

the moment consciousness tapers off, a(a!ening (ill immediately occur. On the other hand, if lapses do not occur, and are replaced by complete alertness, the follo(ing tric!s of the trade may help+ full concentration on mental actions or, conversely, musing and daydreaming in parallel (ith the techni1ue being used. It should be noted that these are only effective at the initial stages of (or!ing (ith direct techni1ues since such techni1ues have a strong sleep#inducing effect. If direct techni1ues do not lead to light sleep or singular lapses after a long period of regular practice, then it must be assumed that the practitioner is dealing (ith some appreciable error in techni1ue or in the length of performance. Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be modified by body position during practice or by changing the variation used (hile performing techni1ues. ,ntering the phase (ith a free#floating state of mind most often occurs as the result of three !ey factors. 9irst, one techni1ue or another may begin to (or! (ell during a lapse. 3econd, nearness to the phase may une$pectedly manifest itself through sounds or vibration after a lapse. 6uring this, transitioning to techni1ues that correspond to the above symptoms Flistening in, straining the brainG may be applied. Third, (hen e$iting a lapse, it is sometimes easy to separate or 1uic!ly find a (or!ing techni1ue by paying attention to initial indicators. /apses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 1AAJ of cases. 5o(ever, striving to achieve lapses plays a very important role since they are not al(ays perceivable, and a lapse occurrence is not al(ays obvious. They can be very short in duration or shallo(. Or, they may not occur at all. 'onetheless, properly applied techni1ues to produce lapses may give entrance to the phase. A5EI<IA:9 2ACTO:S

sing direct techni1ues in the evening or in the middle of the night ta!e advantage of the bodyDs natural state of fatigue and for practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. 9or e$ample, direct techni1ues more easily lead to success if the practitioner is considerably sleep#deprived. Moreover, in such a state, inducing a free#floating state of mind may be forgone. The most important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately, in addition to employing the appropriate variations (ith the techni1ues. -illful deprivation of sleep is torturous and useless even though great results may be achieved by an e$perienced and !no(ledgeable practitioner in a severely fatigued state. 4eginners are better off approaching all forms of practice in a natural, balanced (ay. 0n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of sleep deprivationI physical and emotional fatigues also play important roles. In that case, the most important thing is not to fall asleep (hen performing the techni1ues, and thus one must select a more active techni1ue variation than usual. ST:ATEG9 2O: ACTIO+ 6irect techni1ues seldom produce 1uic! and clear results, unli!e entering the phase via becoming conscious (hile dreaming or through the use of indirect techni1ues. 0t first, direct techni1ues produce sporadic results, (hich is (hy the path of practice should not begin (ith direct techni1ues hoping for fast results. It is better to systematically practice a techni1ue, (or!ing to(ard mastery on a consistent basis. There is no cause for (orry if results are achieved after a month of daily attempts. 0 continual effort to analy=e practice and improve should be the primary focus because failures are al(ays caused by distinguishable mista!es. 0lthough difficulties may arise (ith direct techni1ues, one should never abandon (hat (or!ed until then Fi.e. indirect techni1uesG, as this could temporarily deprive one of the e$perience that one has gained so far.

0 combination of direct and indirect techni1ues should never be used during the course of a single day since this (ould be detrimental to practical focus and enthusiasm. It is better to separately perform each type of techni1ue on different days. 9or e$ample, direct techni1ues could be used before falling asleep during the (or!(ee! (hile indirect techni1ues may be practiced during the (ee!ends (hen a practitioner has more chances to e$periment using the e$tra opportunities to sleep. T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )IT8 &I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES 0ssuming an incorrect position (hen lying do(n. Performing direct techni1ues during the day (hen a practitioner is ine$perienced, instead of in the evening or at nightI Performing more than one attempt per day. Performing protracted rela$ation before the techni1ues, even (hen this may play a negative role. Performing the techni1ues for too long (hen they should be e$ercised for no more than )A minutes. 9orgetting to affirm a strong intention of a(a!ening during a lapse of consciousness. /ac! of a free#floating state of mind. This is mandatory 9alling asleep during lapses in a free#floating state of mind, instead of (or!ing to(ard multiple lapses (hile a(a!ening. 9orgetting separation techni1ues and a(aiting some un!no(n event upon emergence from a lapse, instead of ta!ing advantage of the moment. ,$cessively alternating the techni1ues in a primary repertoire, instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner. 5olding the breath (hen unusual sensations are encountered. 0l(ays be calm. 5alting practice (hen unusual sensations occur (hen it is necessary to continue (hat brought about the sensations. ,$cessive e$citement (hile performing direct techni1ues.

 /ac! of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep deprivation. /ac! of a clear plan of action. nderstanding and planning the use of distinct variations of the techni1ues beforehand is crucial to the analysis of subse1uent errors in practice.

E-ercises for Cha ter %

=uestions 1. -hich techni1ues should be mastered before proceeding to direct techni1ues. ). 3hould results from the use of direct techni1ues be e$pected after several days or a (ee!. 7. Is it better to practice direct techni1ues during the day or in the evening. :. Is it correct to perform three direct attempts per day. ;. -hich body position should be assumed (hen suffering from insomnia. <. -hich body position should be used by a person (ho falls asleep 1uic!ly. >. 5o( much time should be spent on a single direct attempt. ?. -hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of time than usual. @. -hat is the best (ay for an ine$perienced practitioner to rela$. 1A. *an direct techni1ues substitute rela$ation techni1ues. 11. *an rela$ation techni1ues substitute direct techni1ues. 1). 5o( many variations for performing direct techni1ues are there. 17. In (hat case is the variation of se1uencing (ith direct techni1ues employed. 1:. -hich techni1ue may not be used for direct entrance to the phase (ith the goal of creating a free#floating state of mind.

1;. -hat happens to consciousness (hile in a free#floating state during direct techni1ues. 1<. 3hould a(a!ening be attempted if falling asleep occurred (hile using direct techni1ues. 1>. -hat is the probability of entering the phase (ithout a free# floating state of consciousness. 1?. -hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni1ues most often end in. 1@. Is se$ual activity before an evening attempt using direct techni1ue beneficial. Tasks 1. *hoose the best body position for direct techni1ues based on your individual preferences. ). se the classical variation of performing direct techni1ues until it phase entrance, or falling asleep several times. 7. sing a combination of variations for direct techni1ues, achieve a free#floating state of mind. :. -hen performing direct techni1ues, try to achieve no less than three lapses in consciousness before )A minutes elapse, or before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase entrance is achieved.

Cha ter ' " Beco(ing Conscious )hile &rea(ing

T8E CO+CEPT O2 TEC8+I=5ES I+?O<?I+G BECO,I+G CO+SCIO5S )8I<E &:EA,I+G The techni1ues for phase entrance via becoming conscious (hile dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self#a(areness during a dream, (hich, regardless of dream 1uality, can be transitioned into a fully reali=ed phase e$perience. *ontrary to popular opinion, having an out#of#body e$perience through dreaming differs little from other techni1uesI the primary results of (hich may be persistently categori=ed as dissociative e$periences+ being fully conscious (hile removed from the perception of a physical body. The realism of a phase induced through becoming conscious in a dream does not differ from phases entered using other techni1ues, and, (hen deepened, the phase offers more vivid and lucid e$periences than those of everyday life. If a practitioner becomes a(are of a dream (hile in it Fusually accompanied by a clear reali=ation that it is, "&ust a dream%G, then the phase is e$perienced from that moment for(ard. 4eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious (hile dreaming (ith induced dreaming. 0n induced dream is the dream of a specific topic, provo!ed on demandI this does not presuppose consciousness. Moreover, not all practitioners clearly understand (hat it means to be fully conscious (hile dreaming. *onsciousness (hile dreaming is al(ays present to some e$tent, but it is necessary to be as conscious as one (ould be in a (a!eful state. 0(areness is not possible as long as the plot of the dream continues. -hen full understanding occurs that everything around is &ust a dream, a person drops the dream and starts doing only (hat he (ants to do at that

very moment. 0nd after a(a!ening, he should not thin! that (hat happened (as absurd or une$plainable. 6uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream, a practitionerDs actions must be completely subordinated to the desire to e$perience a 1uality phase. This is (hy, upon becoming conscious in a dream, proceeding to techni1ues related to deepening and maintaining is crucial. Techni1ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ very much in nature from other techni1ues, and there are good reasons (hy these methods are differentiated from other practices, li!e so#called astral pro1ection or out-of-"ody e#perience BOB2). 5o(ever, their characteristics differ very little in terms of results. The techni1ue#related peculiarities rest in the fact that specific actions are not re1uired to produce immediate, concrete results. 0ll techni1ue#related elements are performed outside of (hen consciousness (hile dreaming occurs. This is because it is impossible to ta!e some action if you are not conscious and do not reali=e that you are dreaming. 0ll efforts are directed at ma!ing that very reali=ation someho( occur. Interesting Fact! 2ven if a practitioner pays no heed to the techni4ues for "eco$ing conscious &hile drea$ing, "ut applies direct or indirect techni4ues, on average each fifth phase &ill still occur through "eco$ing conscious in a drea$( This has "een statistically proven at se$inars of the School of Out-of-Body Travel( Many strive to achieve consciousness during each dream over the course of an entire nightI ho(ever, this is rarely possible due to physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep and dreams are an important part of a human life. There is an important need to s(itch off not only body, but also consciousness, so that it may

unconsciously sift and process the vast volume of information obtained in everyday life. The timeframe for achieving conscious dreaming is very difficult to estimate due to the nature of re1uired actions. Intensity and intention definitely e$ert heavy influence. 0 practitioner may become conscious in a dream (hen first lapsing into sleep, regardless of (hen it occurs. Or, (ith regular attempts, this could happen in t(o (ee!s to a month. 'evertheless, these techni1ues promise a much higher li!elihood of success than direct methods, and can be compared (ith indirect techni1ues # inferior to the latter only in terms of the speed at (hich results are achieved and the amount of effort re1uired. -hile indirect techni1ues yield ma$imum results in light of a full nightDs rest, the amount of time spent in bed is not a significant factor to achieving dream consciousness. Therefore, this techni1ue is sure to guarantee entry into the phase, especially if difficulty has been encountered (hile practicing other techni1ues. Techni1ues used to attain dream consciousness should not be combined (ith other types of techni1ues. It is better to focus on one thing at a time. -nterestingly, &hen a techni4ue is practiced on a regular "asis, there is nearly a 1 7 guarantee that drea$ consciousness &ill spontaneously occur( % practitioner $ust +no& ho& to react &hen this happens( TEC8+I=5ES 2O: BECO,I+G CO+SCIO5S I+ A &:EA, It is possible to simultaneously practice several techni1ues for becoming conscious in a dream since every techni1ue is directly compatible and complementary to another. :e(e(bering &rea(s There is a (ell !no(n and (idespread of fallacy that supposes that dreams do not occur for some people. ,veryone dreams, but not everyone remembers their dreams. ,ven those (ho actively dream remember only a small fraction of these nightly e$cursions. 5ence,

one should not thin! that it is impossible for someone (ho does not remember dreams to become conscious in one. 3uch a person should simply try to use the techni1ues. 0t the same time, there is a direct correlation bet(een the number of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming conscious (hile dreaming. That is (hy developing the ability to remember dreams is crucial. In essence, the ability to achieve dream consciousness rests (ith the conscious mind, (hich is very much interconnected (ith memory#related processes. *onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams, but it lac!s rapid, operative memory. 6reamers may !no( (ho they are, their names, ho( to (al!, and ho( to tal!, but may not !no( ho( surrounding events are related, or the nature of their significance. 4y increasing the fre1uency of remembered dreams, short#term dream memory becomes more developed, (hich enables more realistic dream e$periences follo(ed by a higher probability of dream consciousness. There are three techni1ues dedicated to increasing the number of remembered dreams. The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon a(a!ening. -ithin the first fe( minutes of (a!ing up, try to remember as many dreams from the night before as possible. This should be done (ith a great amount of attention and diligence because this e$ercise strengthens the memory. If possible, during the day, or, better yet, before going to sleep at night, recalling the previous nightDs dreams once again is highly beneficial. -riting dreams do(n in a special dream &ournal is much more effective than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning (hile memories are still fresh. The more details recalled (hen recording the dream, the better the ultimate results. This is a very attentive approach that demands a higher a(areness than simple recollection. -riting dreams in a &ournal significantly increases a(areness of actions and aspirations. 0nother (ay of remembering dreams is to create a map of the dream (orld. This is called drea$ cartography and is similar to

!eeping a &ournal, though an enhanced level of a(areness is developed by connecting dream episodes on a map. 9irst, record one dream, describing locations and events, (hich are plotted on the map. This cartographic process is repeated (ith each subse1uent dream, and after several dreams an episode (ill occur that is someho( related to the location of a dream that has already been recorded. The t(o dreams that too! place near each other are plotted ne$t to each other on the map. Over time, more and more interrelated dreams (ill occur and the map (ill become increasingly concentrated rather than disconnected. 0s a result, the fre1uency and realistic 1uality of remembered dreams (ill increase, and the dreamer (ill increase the ability to achieve consciousness (hile dreaming. It is best to set remembered dreams to memory after temporary a(a!enings versus (aiting until morning. To accomplish this, it helps to have a pen and a piece of paper nearby so that a practitioner may 1uic!ly &ot do(n a phase or several !ey (ords from the plot of the dream before falling bac! asleep. sing this information, the ma&ority of dreams are 1uic!ly and completely recalled. The initial result from e$ercising these techni1ues is a rapid increase in the number of remembered dreams. -hen this number becomes significant Fany(here bet(een five and 1A per nightG, dream consciousness follo(s on a regular basis. Intention Intention is crucial to the success of any techni1ue. -ith regard to dream consciousness, its significance is multiplied. The creation of intention is ine$tricably lin!ed to the creation of internal aspiration, (hich has reverberations in both conscious and unconscious states. In reality, an elevated degree of intention operates as a po(erful method of mental programming. This techni1ue is performed before falling asleep by affirming a strong desire to become conscious (hile dreaming. 9or best results, alongside a strong, clearly defined intention, thin! through (hat actions (ill be ta!en (hen dream consciousness is achieved.

Creating an Anchor 3ince dream consciousness is not lin!ed to specific actions that ta!e place (ithin a dream and sensory perception continues to operate in the dream state, it is possible to develop and use an artificially conditioned refle$ to achieve consciousness. The essence of this techni1ue is to train the consciousness to uniformly react to certain stimuli that occur (hile being a(a!e and (hen dreaming, establishing a habit of specific response every time a certain situation occurs. 9or e$ample, (hile a(a!e, a practitioner may as!, "0m I dreaming.% every time they see an anchor. 0n anchor is any ob&ect that is often encountered (hile a(a!e and (hile dreaming. ,$amples of anchors include a practitionerDs o(n hands, red ob&ects, or running (ater. -hen first using this techni1ue, a practitioner (ill be unable to 1uestion (hether a dream is in progress every time a pre#established anchor is encountered. 5o(ever, (ith training and a strong desire this techni1ue 1uic!ly produces results. Over time, subconscious 1uestioning of the practitionerDs state becomes habit, happening (hile a(a!e and dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness. It is important to note that one needs not only to simply as! this 1uestion, but that it is also important to ans(er it mindfully, trying to isolate oneself from surrounding events in order to be able to ans(er it in an as ob&ective and unpredetermined (ay as possible. 9ailing to ans(er ob&ectively (ill al(ays result in a negative response FnoG, and dream consciousness (ill not be achieved. +atural Anchors In addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce conscious dreaming, natural anchors should be given focused attention. These are ob&ects and actions that regularly cause dream consciousness, even (hen consciousness is not desired. 4eing a(are of the e$istence of natural anchors actually doubles the chances of their appearance. The follo(ing e$periences are common natural anchors that are present in dreams+ death, sharp pain, intense fear, stress, flying, electric shoc!, se$ual sensations, and dreaming about phase entrance

or the phase environment. -hen attempting dream consciousness, identifying natural anchors produces results nearly 1AAJ of the time. One may try to start flying each time that one ans(ers the 1uestion. This is of course pointless (hen in (a!ing reality. 5o(ever, (hen dreaming, this (ill most li!ely lead to flight and once again prove that everything around is &ust a dream. Self-Analysis *onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons for an absence of conscious a(areness+ these analyses are significant to attaining dream consciousness. Over the course of a lifetime, the mind gro(s accustomed to the parado$ical nature of dreams and pays less attention to them. This becomes apparent (hile trying to understand that a red crocodile is unable to tal!, cannot be red, nor can it rent an apartment. -hile dreaming, these impossibilities are never called into 1uestion. The essence of self#analysis is remembering dreams and thin!ing hard about (hy their parado$ical features had not been ade1uately recogni=ed in the dream state. -ith e$perience, the everyday analysis of the correspondence of dreams to reality begins to have an effect on a practitionerDs reasoning (ithin the dream state. 9or e$ample, that red crocodileDs presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts that give pause for reflection, (hich could in turn lead to the understanding that everything happening is &ust a dream. ACTIO+S TO BE &O+E )8E+ BECO,I+G CO+SCIO5S )8I<E &:EA,I+G To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully developed phase e$perience, one of three specific actions must be ta!en. The best is the techni1ue is deepening, (hich should be immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs. 6eepening must be performed (ithin the dream episode before all other techni1ues. 6oing so virtually guarantees entrance to the phase. The

choice of actions that follo( deepening is dependent upon a practitionerDs predetermined course of plan in the phase. -hen becoming conscious (hile dreaming, it is 1uite dangerous to try to return to oneDs body in order to roll out of it right a(ay unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result in a situation (here, after having easily returned to oneDs body, one (ould not be able to separate from it, as the phase becomes significantly (ea!er (hen physical sensations coincide (ith the position of a real body. If one is to employ such an option, then in order to return to oneDs body one should simply thin! about it, (hich is often sufficient to ma!e the transition occur almost immediately. 0nother option is the use of translocation techni1ues to arrive at a desired place (ithin the phase (orld. It is also dangerous to employ this variation (ithout first deepeningI translocating in a shallo( phase ma!es a return to the (a!eful state very li!ely. Translocation is often accompanied by a substantial decrease in the depth of the phase state. ST:ATEG9 2O: ACTIO+ To achieve dream consciousness, constant practice is highly necessary because sporadic practice (ill fail to develop the re1uisite bac!ground thought processes. 0s a rule, employing phase entry techni1ues (ithin the conte$t of dream consciousness produces results after several (ee!s, and the effects of the techni1ues are increasingly pronounced (ith time. If there are no results (ithin a month or t(o, refrain from these techni1ues for a period of time, ta!e a brea! for a (ee! or t(o, and resolve to assume a fresh start later. Practitioners often stop using these techni1ues after initial results as later effects become elusive and the fre1uency of dream consciousness rapidly declines. These techni1ues should not be abandoned after first yielding results, though a gradual decrease in practice is generally acceptable.

T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )8E+ P:ACTICI+G BECO,I+G CO+SCIO5S )8I<E &:EA,I+G Perceiving the state of dream consciousness as a non#phase state even though this phenomenon is one and the same (ith the phase. 0ttempting dream consciousness (hile performing other phase entrance techni1ues (hen it is better to focus on dream consciousness alone. -hen falling asleep, lac!ing sufficient desire to e$perience conscious dreaming even though this is critical. *ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream even after achieving dream consciousness, (hereas subse1uent actions must be independent and based on free (ill. Incorrectly ans(ering the 1uestion "0m I dreaming.% (hile dreaming. 9orgetting to immediately begin deepening techni1ues (hen dream consciousness has been achieved. -hen e$ercising memory development, recalling the most vivid dreams instead of every dream. Inconsistent concentration (hile practicing dream consciousness techni1ues.

E-ercises for Cha ter '

=uestions 1. -hat is the difference bet(een an out#of#body e$perience and dream consciousness. ). 0fter attaining dream consciousness, does the realistic 1uality of the surroundings differ from that of (a!efulness. 7. -hich techni1ue can be used in a dream to become conscious in it. :. Is it possible to achieve dream consciousness after the first attempt. ;. Is it true that not all people dream.

<. -hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible important for becoming conscious (hile dreaming. >. -hat is dream cartography. ?. To e$perience dream consciousness, (hat must be done (hile falling asleep. @. *ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achieve dream consciousness. 1A. -hat e$periences in dreams often spontaneously give rise to a state of conscious a(areness. 11. -hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious (hile dreaming. Tasks 1. ,very day, immediately before going to sleep, cultivate a strong desire to become conscious in future dreams. ). -hen you (a!e up, recall or (rite do(n the episodes and plots of your dreams every day. 7. Try to achieve at least one instance of dream consciousness.

Cha ter * " +on-autono(ous ,ethods

T8E ESSE+CE O2 +O+-A5TO+O,O5S ,ET8O&S 2O: E+TE:I+G T8E P8ASE /on-autono$ous $ethods of entering the phase are various types of e#ternal influences that are a"le to help put a practitioner into the phase state( *omputer programs, devices, various physical actions, the aid of a helper, or even chemical substances are e$amples of non# autonomous methods. In certain cases, these methods actually help (hile some hinder the possibility of a genuine phase e$perience. 'ever count on a magical substance or machine to automatically eliminate the difficulties associated (ith phase entrance. If such a substance e$isted, the (hole topic of phase e$perimentation (ould e$ist at an advanced level of development and prevalence in society. In actuality, there are no devices or methods able to consistently provide access to the phase state. 0t best, these e$ist in a largely supplementary capacity, and the more a practitioner is able to do on his or her o(n, the more helpful and effective these supplements are. If phase entry has not been mastered autonomously, then results through the use of supplements (ill be totally accidental. The reason behind the (ea! effectiveness of non#autonomous methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the physiological process responsible for the phase e$perience cannot be e$actly defined. Only generalities are !no(n, nothing else. In order to gain a clear understanding of the state, the processes that give rise to it must be discerned and analy=ed. 0ll e$isting technologies have either blundered do(n a clearly mista!en path Fsynchroni=ing the hemispheres of the brainG, or travelled to(ard the detection and use of indirect indicators Fcueing technologiesG.

C5EI+G TEC8+O<OGIES Of all non#autonomous assistance methods, cueing technologies yield the best results. The operating principle behind cueing technologies is 1uite simple+ a device detects rapid eye movement FR,MG and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner, prompting dream consciousness or an a(a!ening that may be follo(ed by indirect techni1ues. *ueing programs or devices may also send indicators over specific intervals of timeI these are received during R,M sleep and are meant to cause a sleeping practitioner to a(a!en and attempt indirect techni1ues. More sophisticated R,M#detecting technologies may be purchased at speciali=ed stores or through online merchandisers. R,M#detecting technologies (or! by virtue of special night mas! e1uipped (ith a motion sensor that detects the fre1uency of specific eye movements that occur during R,M sleep. -hen the eye movements reach R,M 1uality, the device sends discreet signals to the practitioner through light, sound, vibrations, or a combination of these. In turn, the practitioner must discern the signal and react to it (hile sleeping (ith the goal of phase entry through dream consciousness. The effectiveness of R,M#detecting devices is more plausible in theory than in practice. The mind 1uic!ly develops a tolerance for these types of e$ternal stimuli and stops reacting, and, as a result, such technologies are hardly used more than one or t(o nights per (ee!. 3econdly, a practitioner (ill detect only a small portion of the signals, and conscious reaction occurs in even smaller instances. *ueing technologies are best used to send signals that allo( a practitioner to a(a!en (ithout moving during R,M sleep, (hich facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through indirect techni1ues. Pricing of these "mind#machines% Fthe common moni!er of any device that purports to produce altered consciousnessG (idely varies and is determined by 1uality of R,M detection and signaling. 0vailable models include+ 6ream3tal!er, 6reamMa!er

F'ova6reamerG, R,M#6reamer, 0stral *atapult, among many others. 3ince the use of these devices does not guarantee increased success in practice, investing money in the technology is not recommended. If a practitioner is curious about cueing technologies, similar devices may be constructed at home using a special computer program and a run#of#the#mill optical mouse. 6esigns for a homegro(n setup are easily located on the Internet. 0nother do#it#yourself (ay of e$perimenting (ith cueing is through the use of a computer, a music player, or even the alarm cloc! function on a mobile phone. The practitioner saves short sounds or phrases, played as an alarm every 1; to 7A minutes (hile sleeping. These sounds (ill signal the practitioner to (a!e up and attempt indirect techni1ues. If the practitioner decides to use cueing technology, several fundamental principles should be considered as results (ill be less li!ely if they are ignored. 9irst, mind#machines should be used no more than t(ice a (ee!. Other(ise, too high a tolerance (ill be built up, rendering the machines ineffective. 3econd, use cueing technology in combination (ith the deferred method, (hich (as covered in the section on indirect techni1ues. It is better to sleep for si$ hours (ithout distraction and then, after sleep has been interrupted, put on a sleep#mas! or earpiece and continue sleeping. 3leep (ill be light for the remaining t(o to four hours as there (ill be more R,M sleep, ma!ing it easier for the mind to detect cueing signals. 9inally, master indirect techni1ues before ma!ing use of cueing technologies to attain dream consciousness and subse1uent phase entrance. )O:>I+G I+ PAI:S -or!ing in pairs is considered the second most effective non# autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner is to be the active one, and the other fills the role of helper. The active one practitioner attempts to enter the phase (hile the helper provides various types of support to this end.

9or e$ample, the active practitioner lies do(n in bed (hile the helper stays nearby, (aiting for the active one to fall asleep. -hen sleep occurs, the helper observes the eyes of the active, (atching for the signs of R,M sleep, (hich is mainly characteri=ed by 1uic! eye movements. -hen R,M is apparent, the helper (hispers to the sleeper, communicating that everything the practitioner is e$periencing is a dream. The helper may vary the volume of the (hisper, use touch to strengthen the signal, or shine a flashlight on the sleeperDs eyelids H (hich is very effective. The active practitioner should detect the signals (ithout (a!ing and indicate a state of conscious a(areness by performing 1uic!, cyclical eye movements. If no such indication is given, the helper continues to rouse the active practitioner, (ho may finally (a!e. If the active practitioner is unable to stay in the dream, indirect techni1ues should be performed. The active practitioner should under no circumstances move upon a(a!ening or (aste valuable seconds before transitioning to indirect attempts. If phase entrance does not occur after e$ercising the techni1ues, the practitioner should again fall asleep (ith the intention of ma!ing another attempt. 2enerally, several such attempts are enough to glean results. -or!ing in pairs is best performed &ust prior to a daytime nap, or (ith the same deferred method used for indirect techni1ues # an early#morning interruption of a practitionerDs nighttime sleep. TEC8+O<OGIES 2O: I+&5CI+G T8E P8ASE The ambition to create a device facilitates 1uic! and easy phase entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies that claim to fulfill such a role. 0s already stated, none of these devices has been proven effective. The most famous of these is the 5emi#3ync system, (hich purports to synchroni=e the t(o hemispheres of the brain. 5emi#3ync (as developed by Robert Monroe, an 0merican esotericism e$pert researcher. The idea behind 5emi#3ync is that out#of#body sensations may be induced by achieving synchroni=ation of the brainDs t(o

hemispheres. 5o(ever, this type of approach yields a parado$ for the lac! of scientific For pseudo#scientificG evidence that hemispheric synchroni=ation influences sensory perception. 0ctually, it is the cerebral corte$ and constituents that are primarily responsible for sensory perception. 0t the beginning of the )Ath century, it became clear that the !ey roles in sensory processes are played by varying levels of inhibition and activity in the cerebral corte$, and almost not else(here. The !ey to solving the problem of technologically induced phase entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral corte$. 3ynchroni=ation devices have no effect on the operation of the cerebral corte$. The idea of using sounds of various fre1uencies to induce a specific level of electrical activity in the brain is, so far, considered impossible. Thus, the sounds and noises used to assist separation from the body cannot directly affect the process, but merely serve as cueing signals. 3uch a system (or!s only after having been used for a long time, if it (or!s at all. Moreover, it might only (or! once or t(ice. 'evertheless, synchroni=ation systems are able to help practitioners reach a free floating state of consciousness since the systems prevent sleep or induce (a!efulness, providing fertile ground for direct phase entry. 5o(ever, the systems have nothing at all to do (ith synchroni=ing the t(o hemispheres of the brain. The idea of inducing various phase states through sound has gained (ide attention. Many other programs and technologies have appeared as a result, including, for e$ample, the 4rain -ave 2enerator F4-2G, (hich allo(s the practitioner to independently e$periment (ith a (ide array of sounds and fre1uencies and various methods of transmission. The effect is the same+ cueing during sleep or the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus, there is no noticeable difference bet(een using machines and listening to similar sounds or musical compositions. Inasmuch as the devices described above have not delivered notable result, the search for ne( technologies continues unhindered. The number of ideas to e$ert noninvasive influence over the brain

and its constituent parts is increasing. 9or e$ample, there is a theory that phase e$periences may be induced by electromagnetically stimulating the left angular gyrus. 5o(ever, this, li!e all other non# autonomous methods, is strictly based on theory. 0t present, consistent, focused, unassisted practice is the simplest and only guaranteed means to achieving phase entrance. 89P+OSIS A+& S5GGESTIO+ 5ypnosis is a little#studied method of entering the phase. The idea is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the phase through suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that hypnosis is an interesting concept, especially for persons (ho easily yield to po(er of suggestion, but such individuals account for only 1J of the population. 6ue to specific characteristics of human perception, the chances are nil that hypnosis is a li!ely conduit to phase entrance. 3o, it seems unli!ely that hypnotic techni1ues (ill become (ell#!no(n, or that a top#notch hypnotist (ould, through suggestion, easily be able to lead a sub&ect directly into the phase. 5o(ever, it is completely feasible that hypnotic suggestion may promote higher fre1uency in dream consciousness or a(a!ening (ithout moving Fand remembering to do indirect techni1uesG. 5ere again, this method is only a facilitator, (hile actual phase entrance depends on the efforts of the practitioner. P89SIO<OGICA< SIG+A<S The simplest (ay to supplement the practice is establishing a reminder that prompts conscious a(a!ening and subse1uent indirect techni1ues. This may be accomplished by blindfolding the eyes or tying a cord taut around an arm or leg. The idea is that the reminder is immediately felt (hen the practitioner (a!es, prompting the attempt of indirect techni1ues. In actuality, mind#machines (or!

using the same principle since these are most effective as cues that arouse an intention to perform a specific action. 0 more sophisticated e$ample of a reminder is (hen a practitioner do=es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a certain body part. -hile a(a!ening, the practitioner (ill ta!e the physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni1ues. 0 secondary benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that the numb body part may easily be used to perform phantom (iggling. 9alling asleep (hile lying on the bac! (ith an arm behind the head, or by lying directly on an arm are effective e$amples. These and other postures (ill impede circulation, cause numbness, and promote a(a!ening. 'aturally, the numbness should not be e$cessive. 6iverse e$periments that e$ploit physiological needs are especially popular for inducing conscious a(a!ening or becoming conscious (hile dreaming. 9or e$ample, a practitioner may forgo (ater over the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase. The effect is an acute thirst (hile dreaming, (hich may be used to communicate that the dream state has ta!en over. Or, thirst causes repeated a(a!enings, during (hich the practice of indirect techni1ues may commence. 0n alternative to depriving the body of (ater is including more salt in foods consumed before going to sleep. 0nother method is to drin! a lot of (ater before sleep, causing the practitioner to a(a!en, naturally producing an opportunity to perform indirect techni1ues. sing this has been !no(n to result in dream consciousness. 0nother popular method helps (ith direct techni1ues. It (or!s by falling asleep (hile !eeping the forearm propped up at the elbo(. -hen the practitioner falls asleep, the forearm falls to the bed as the body shuts do(n. 9eeling the arm fall signals a lapse of consciousness, after (hich direct techni1ues may be attempted. If this method fails to produce results on the first try, it may be repeated by raising the forearm before falling asleep. This method helps some, but rarely on the first try. It should not be counted as panacea. /i!e all other non#autonomous methods, practicing phase entrance using physiological signals should not be done on a regular basis.

There are more pleasant, autonomous techni1ues that only re1uire a natural (illpo(er and healthy desire. C8E,ICA< S5BSTA+CES 3ince the beginning, the history of advances in phase entrance methodologies has included a direct lin! to the use of consumable supplements, starting (ith plants and mushrooms in ancient times. The use of speciali=ed herbs, mushrooms, and cacti is still practiced in isolated culturesI 3iberian shamans and 'orth 0merican Indians, for e$ample. 0mid the hunger for altered states of a(areness, these chemical supplements have reached every corner of the developed (orld. 5o(ever, the proliferation of these substances has caused a mar!ed degradation in the progress of modern phase practice. The names and descriptions of these various chemical concoctions, herbs and plants included, are not (orthy of inclusion in this te$t. They are officially considered illegal in some countries (hile still available in the pharmacies of othersI nevertheless, they are all dangerous. There are t(o primary problems (ith using such supplements. 9irst, practicing the phase through the consumption of chemical substances and various herbal supplements is not a path to development, but to ruin. 6rug abuse and personal development are polar opposites, in no (ay compatible. *heap thrills are consistently follo(ed by chemical dependencies and health problems. 3econd, although a user may e$perience phase sensations under the influence of such substances, the 1uality of e$perience is completely different. It is not only the stability or depth of phase that are affected by these supplements, but a userDs consciousness and a(areness. The use of substances and the resultant alteration of mental processes negatively impact self#a(areness. The phase must be accompanied by t(o things+ phase sensations and a complete, conscious a(areness. If one of these is missing, then the state e$perienced, by definition, is not the phase. -hen descriptions of

these chemically "enhanced% e$periences are studied, the hallmar! of every one is a complete lac! of control. sing any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach the phase must be ruled out. 3ummarily, these ma!e it impossible to e$perience the phase and ultimately destroy physical and mental health. T8E 25T5:E O2 +O+-A5TO+O,O5S ,ET8O&S 2O: E+TE:I+G T8E P8ASE ,ven though no beneficial non#autonomous technologies currently e$ist, the future is (ide open before them. -ith the development of effective technologies, the phase (ill cease as the e$clusive domain of the initiated and become a (idespread practice. Only then (ill the Fsometimes &ustifiedG stereotypes and pre&udices connected to the mystical nature of the phenomenon be dispelled, and only then (ill the phase gain the necessary attention from researchers needed to ably develop the science of phase practice. -hen e$ternally applied methods that cause phase entrance are discovered, the human e$perience (ill drastically change. These technologies for inducing and monitoring phase e$periences (ill open up incredible possibilities. 9or e$ample, it (ill be possible to participate in a movie instead of &ust (atchingI people (ill be able to try and evaluate products (ithout leaving homeI travel throughout designed (orlds (ill ta!e placeI computer games (ill be substituted (ith analogous e$periences including real physical sensations. The ultimate step (ould be the unification of phase e$periences into a collective, parallel (orld integrated to e$istent digital net(or!s+ the Matri$ Fthe MindnetG. sing this Matri$, it (ill be possible to communicate (ith someone on the other side of the planet # not &ust through a broadband video lin!, but literally tCte D tCte. This vision of the future is a drop in the ocean of possibilities that (ill open (ith phase entrance technologies. The first step to(ard the future is a thorough, pragmatic, and correct application of the techni1ues no( available.

T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )IT8 +O+-A5TO+O,O5S TEC8+I=5ES The belief that devices are able to phase entrance if autonomous techni1ues fail, even though it is much easier to enter the phase through strictly individual efforts. -asting a large amount of time and effort on various technologies to create a phase state. 'o such technology e$ists. sing cueing technologies on a daily basis, even though they arenDt supposed to be used more than t(ice a (ee!. sing cueing technologies all night long, (hen it is much better to use these in con&unction (ith the deferred method. sing cueing technologies (ithout affirming a personal intention of appropriate reaction to the signals+ this is crucial to cue effectiveness. -or!ing in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep, even though R,M sleep occurs infre1uently, and then for only short periods of time. -hile (or!ing in pairs, the helper giving an active practitioner too strong a signal. 3ignals should be !ept discreet to prevent (a!ing the sleeper. ,mploying an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre1uency of dream consciousness. The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner (ho is not susceptible to hypnosis. sing physiological signals on a daily basis, causing physical discomfort versus getting en&oyment out of the practice. The belief chemical substances promote dissociative e$periences. 0cting on this belief is e1uivalent to drug abuse.

E-ercises for Cha ter *

=uestions

1. 0re techni1ues based on breathing be considered non# autonomous methods of entering the phase. ). -hich non#autonomous and non#chemical means allo( phase entrance after the first attempts. 7. -hy is it still not possible to create a device that causes phase entry. :. 0re cueing technologies beneficial to overcoming difficulties (ith conscious a(a!ening. ;. -hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies for seven days in a ro(. <. *an cueing technologies ma!e use of light signals. >. *an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of phase entry. ?. -ill putting a tight rubber band around an an!le promote phase entry. @. -hile (or!ing in a pair, are both practitioners re1uired to enter the phase. 1A. *an the helper be compared to a cueing device (hile (or!ing in a pair. 11. -hen should the helper give the signal that the active practitioner is dreaming. 1). -ould a hypnotist ma!ing suggestions about entering the phase be helpful to every practitioner. 17. -hy do phase#inducing technologies sometimes (or!, even though these are based on fla(ed theories. 1:. -hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical substances. Tasks 1. Try using a cueing device several times in con&unction (ith the deferred method. *reate a short sound file and set it to a device that plays the file bet(een 1;#minute intervals of silence. ). 4efore going to sleep at night, try the raised forearm method of entering the phase several times. 0ttempt this using the deferred method.

7. If you have the opportunity, try to achieve entry into the phase by (or!ing in pairs.

Part II ,anaging the Out-of-Body E- erience

Cha ter . - &ee ening

T8E CO+CEPT O2 &EEPE+I+G 3eepening refers to techni4ues that induce realistic perception and a&areness in the phase state( The phase is not an e$act, fi$ed state (here a practitioner is present or not. It is a realm of states characteri=ed by a transition from the usual perception of the physical body to a complete alienation from it, (hile maintaining consciousness and reality of perception, albeit in a different frame of space. The transition begins (ith perception of the natural, physical body follo(ed by a moment of ambiguity (here a clear e$perience of body is intermingled (ith a sense of the perceived body. 0fter(ard, the perceived body enters the phase space, (hile the physical body becomes a memory. 0t this point, the perceived senses may be 1uite dullI for e$ample, vision may be blurred or completely absent. 6eepening techni1ues solve the problem of diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase. 3ensory e$periences (ithin a fully reali=ed phase e$perience are as realistic as those in everyday reality. In almost one#half of all cases, practitioners observe that reality#based surroundings pale in comparison to vibrant detail and color of the phase space. To this end, after entering the phase, a practitioner must perform deepening techni1ues to enhance and solidify the degree and 1uality of phase reality.

9ull spatial perception in the phase only occurs after deepening techni1ues have been applied. There (ould be no point to remaining in the phase (ithout deepening. 9or e$ample, (hat is the point in finding a person in phase, if it is not even possible to discern his or her eyes there. -n a considera"le nu$"er of cases, deepening is not necessary, since the phase e#perience is co$pletely realistic, if not hyperrealistic( -n cases li+e these, deepening $ay "e "ypassed( 6eepening is also related to the length of time a practitioner may remain in the phase. If an action is ta!en (ithout a deep, realistic phase, the e$perience (ill al(ays be several times shorter in duration than a phase (here deepening techni1ues had been applied. The properties of the phase space very much depend on its depth. -hen surroundings are blurry and unclear, the stability of ob&ects is very (ea!. There is a direct correlation bet(een the realism of a phase and a practitionerDs level of a(areness, so it is e$tremely important to ensure a deep phase in order to promote ma$imum a(areness.

Interesting Fact! The realis$ of a deep phase space is often so great that it causes uncontrolla"le fear or shoc+( 6eepening should only be performed follo(ing complete separation from the body. If initiated before separation, the phase may end prematurely. If complete separation does not occur, primary deepening should be used. 0s regards the deepening techni1ues themselves, there is one main one and there are several subsidiary ones. The main techni1ue, (hich does not present any difficulties, is sufficient for having a successful practice. Interesting Fact! -gnorance of deepening techni4ues has led to a great nu$"er of "aseless theories and superstitions( So$e practices treat differing phase depths as various states and even &orlds( -n reality, there are si$ple actions that ensure a singular phase e#perience(

P:I,A:9 &EEPE+I+G TEC8+I=5ES The goal of primary deepening is to achieve complete separation from the body, allo(ing further actions (ithin the phase. Primary deepening entails achieving t(o principal ob&ectives+ complete separation from the physical body and anchoring the perceived body (ithin the phase space. -hen separation from the body occurs through the use of a separation techni1ue, a posture must be assumed that completely different from the posture of the real, physical body. The greater the degree of postural similarity bet(een the physical and perceived bodies, the more shallo( and brief the phase (ill be. 9or e$ample, in the case of hori=ontal levitation, a 1?A turn must immediately performed, arms and legs spread, adopting a vertical posture. nder no circumstances should a practitioner in the phase remain in a posture identical to that of the physical body. If a practitioner is pulled bac! to(ard the body after separation, anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing or sitting in the phase. Resisting the gravity of the physical body is paramount to remaining in the phase. The result of (illful resistance is directly proportional to the degree of applied effort. It (ill help to grab hold of surrounding ob&ects and hold on to themI any means of anchoring the perceived body (ithin the phase are appropriate. It is possible to start rotating around an a$isI not simply imagining the rotation, but performing it (ith the perceived body as (ell. &EEPE+I+G T8:O5G8 SE+SO:9 A,P<I2ICATIO+ The more a phase is e$perienced by the sensory faculties, the deeper and longer the phase (ill be. 3ensory amplification in the phase is the most effective deepening techni1ue precisely because it allo(s the activation of primary internal sensations during the transition from reality to the phase. There are several (ays to perform sensory amplification.

Ealpation is the first deepening techni1ue that should be recalled (hen entering the phase. 8ision may be absent at the beginning of a phase e$perience, but the sensation of occupying a defined space is almost al(ays present. In the case of a completely absent sense of sight, only tactile# !inesthetic perception is possible. That is, movement throughout a space and the touching ob&ects there is the only option (hen vision is absent. The sense of touch plays a !ey role in the perception of everyday reality. 0ccordingly, if the sense of touch is actively used in the phase space, it is only natural that the phase (ill deepen and reach its ma$imum potential. Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything that may be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be done by 1uic!ly but carefully perceiving the feel of surfaces and shapes. 5ands should not remain on a particular place for more than one second, remaining constantly in motion to locate ne( ob&ects. The goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn something about encountered ob&ects or shapes. 9or e$ample, if one feels a mug, one may touch it not only from the outside, but also from the inside. Once a practitioner has rolled out of the body, the bed may be touchedI the physical body lying in bed may be touched, as (ell as the floor, the carpet, nearby (alls, or a bedside table. 0nother palpation techni1ue is performed by rubbing the palms against each other as if trying to (arm them on a cold day. 4lo(ing on the palms also produces sensations that (ill help deepen the phase. 3ince tactile perception of the (orld is not limited to the palms, the hands should be moved over the entire body (hile in the phase to e$cite and fully activate the sense of touch. 0s soon as palpation begins, the feeling that the phase is deepening and becoming fi$ed soon follo(s. sually, it ta!es five to 1A seconds of palpation e$ercises to reach the ma$imum level of deepening. 0fter performing this techni1ue, the pseudo#physical sensations (ill be indistinguishable from those of everyday reality. If vision is absent on phase entry, it 1uic!ly emerges during palpation.

Eeering is the primary technical variation of sensory amplification. 5o(ever, it is not al(ays initially accessible since it re1uires vision, (hich may begin as absent in the phase. Once vision appears or has been created using special techni1ues Fsee *hapter ?G, peering may begin. The effectiveness of this techni1ue originates in the fact that vision is the humanDs primary instrument of perception. Therefore, by e$citing vision to its ma$imum potential (ithin the phase, it is possible to attain a fully immersive phase state that is completely apart from normal reality. Peering should be done at a distance of four to si$ inches from ob&ects (ithin the phase. 0 practitioner should glance over the minute details of ob&ects and surfaces to bring definition to the phase space (hile increasing the 1uality of vision. -hen loo!ing at hands, the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles should be e$amined. If observing a (all, study the te$ture of its (allpaper. -hen loo!ing at a mug, one should loo! carefully at its handle, the curve of its rim, or any inscriptions. 0ttention should not remain on one area of an ob&ect for more than half a second. 0ctive observation should constantly move to ne( ob&ects and their minute details, approaching ob&ects or pic!ing them up to dra( them nearer. ItDs best (hen ob&ects near one anotherI other(ise, too much time is spent moving around. Peering brings 1uic! and clear results. sually, if vision is blurry and there is a yearning to return into the physical body, (ith &ust 7#1A seconds of peering all of this (ill be gone (ithout a trace. 0fter peering, vision ad&usts as 1uic!ly and clearly as if a camera lens (as correctly installed in front of the eyes, capturing the image in the sharpest of focus. Si$ultaneous peering and palpation provide the ma$imum possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of sensory amplification engages the t(o most important perceptive, thus the effect is t(ice greater than (hen the t(o actions are separately performed. If vision is present in the phase, simultaneous peering and palpation is an absolute necessity because it facilitates good phase depth in the 1uic!est and simplest manner.

The combination of palpation and peering must not only be performed simultaneously, but also upon the same ob&ects. 9or e$ample, (hile a practitioner may loo! at the hands and simultaneously rub them against each otherI or (hile loo!ing at a coffee mug, all of its parts may be observed and touched at the same. It is necessary to maintain dynamism of action, remembering that feelings should be e$perienced not half#heartedly, remembering that full concentration on sensory amplification is an e$cellent means to a deep, 1uality phase. SECO+&A:9 &EEPE+I+G TEC8+I=5ES &iving 8eadfirst 6iving headfirst is used if sensory amplification techni1ues do not (or!, or (hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space (here there is nothing to touch or loo! at. This techni1ue (or!s than!s to the unusual vestibular sensations that it causes, (hich help to enhance perception. This techni1ue is performed (ith the eyes shut if vision is available and the practitioner literally dives headfirst into the floor or space at the feet. 0 feeling of movement a(ay from the physical body (ill immediately arise during the flight do(n, and the dive itself (ill be e$perienced as if it is really happening. 3imultaneously, the surrounding space may dar!en and become colder. 0gitation or fear may also appear. 0fter five to 1; seconds of flight, the practitioner is either arrives in an undetermined place in the phase or hits a dead end, li!e a (all. In the case of a dead end, a translocation techni1ue should be used. Translocation may also be attempted if deepening does not occur during the flight, if sense perception stops improving, or if a good degree of realism has already been achieved. 0n alternative to the translocation techni1ue+ hold the hands about four to si$ inches in front of the face and try to observe them (ithout opening the eyesI this (ill move the practitioner to another random location.

-hen falling headfirst, do not thin! about the floorI assume that it (ill be penetrated. This very effective if the phase has not reached a fullness of depth. 0 desire to not simply fall do(n observing oneDs perceptions, but instead race s(iftly do(n(ard (hile trying to move a(ay from the body is e$tremely important. In case of failure to do so, instead of deepening, such a fall may lead to a return to the state of being a(a!e, i.e. to a foul. ?ibration /i!e falling headfirst, the vibration techni1ue should be used if sensory amplification techni1ues do not (or!, or (hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space (here there is nothing to touch or loo! at. 0fter separating from the body, it is normally 1uite easy to create vibrations by thin!ing about them, by straining the brain, or by straining the body (ithout using muscles. The occurrence of vibrations provides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase. 0n advantage of this techni1ue is that it does not re1uire any preliminary actions and thus may be practiced at any moment. The brain is strained to the ma$imum e$tent possible, (hich cause vibrations that may be intensified and managed through spasmodic or prolonged straining. If this techni1ue does not produce deepening after five to 1A seconds, the techni1ue has to be changed or action should be ta!en at the practitionerDs current depth in the phase. Aggressive Action This techni1ue may be used as an alternative to any other deepening techni1ue since it can be used at any moment. Practicing this techni1ue only re1uires aggressive action of the perceived body. 0 practitioner may run, roll on the floor, perform gymnastics, or move the arms and legs. Ma$imum activity and aggression are paramount to the successful use of this techni1ue.

If the practitioner is stuc! in a dar! space, (aving the arms and legs from side to side is appropriate. If the practitioner is in (ater, s(imming (ith determined, po(erful stro!es (ould be suitable recourse. The type of action very much depends on the specific situation along (ith an aggressive desire on the part of the practitioner. 0s a rule, the effect of such movements and relocations comes 1uite 1uic!ly, especially if attention is focused on all the accompanying sensations. I(agining reality This interesting techni1ue should be used by e$perienced practitioners, or if all other deepening techni1ues fail. 0 practitioner aggressively imagines being located in the physical (orld, e$periencing its intrinsic reality of perception, and not in the phase. This should be done (hile in a state of separation from the body (ith a sense of vision present. If successful, the surrounding phase space (ill immediately brighten and sensory perception of the phase (ill e$ceed the normal e$perience of reality. If this techni1ue produces no clear results after a fe( seconds, another techni1ue should be used. GE+E:A< ACTI?IT9 0ll deepening techni1ues should be practiced (ith a high level of aggression, (ith no pauses, only continuous, deliberate action. If techni1ues are practiced in a calm, rela$ed manner, then deepening attempts (ill most often result in falling asleep or returning to the body. T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES &5:I+G &EEPE+I+G 9orgetting to perform deepening techni1ues (hen necessary. *arrying out unnecessary deepening (hile at a sufficient depth.

 5alting deepening techni1ues before reaching ma$imum realism in the phase. *arrying out main deepening techni1ues prior to having become completely separated from the body, although at this time only primary deepening should be used. *ontinuing deepening techni1ues (hen results have already been achieved. 0lternating too 1uic!ly bet(een deepening techni1ues instead of concentrating on each of them for at least five to 1A seconds. Performing the techni1ues slo(ly and calmly instead of aggressively. 0pplying techni1ues of sensory amplification (hile stuc! in a shapeless, dar! space (hen these should only be performed in a vivid and realistic place. Observing ob&ects located too far from the eyes during visual sensori=ation instead of the re1uired four to five inches. -hen peering, scrutini=ing a single detail of an ob&ect for too long (hen it is necessary to 1uic!ly s(itch from one detail to another. Ta!ing in a (hole ob&ect (hen peering (hile only parts of it should be observed. *oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob&ect instead of focusing on different ob&ects in 1uic! succession. /ong palpation of a single ob&ect during sensory amplification instead of rapidly s(itching from one ob&ect to another. 6eepening (hile standing in place (hen it is important to maintain constant motion. 9alling headfirst (ith the eyes open, although the eyes must be shut to avoid crashing into the floor. 9alling headfirst (ithout the desire or intention of falling far and 1uic!ly. 9orgetting to use translocation techni1ues after hitting a dead end. 9orgetting to alternate deepening techni1ues if some of them are not (or!ing.

 9ear of the hyperrealism of the e$perience and halting deepening instead of calmly continuing (ith the techni1ue.

E-ercises for Cha ter .

=uestions 1. 0fter (hich phase entrance techni1ues is deepening necessary. ). -hy is phase deepening necessary. 7. 0re there cases (here phase deepening is unnecessary. :. -hat level of reality should be achieved by deepening. ;. -hen should deepening begin after entering the phase. <. 6oes deepening influence the length of a phase e$perience. >. -hy is primary deepening necessary. ?. May one touch oneDs head (hen the performing sensori=ation of feelings. @. 3hould a practitioner loo! at curtains (hile peering. 1A. Is it effective to apply peering at phase ob&ects from a distance of 1 to 1.; yards. 11. *an peering be used during palpation. 1). -hen should the eyes be closed (hile falling headfirst. 17. -ould thro(ing punches li!e a bo$er help a practitioner to deepen. 1:. 5o( calmly should the deepening techni1ues be performed. Tasks 1. 6evote the ne$t three successful phases to perfecting deepening techni1ues, using all of the methods described in this chapter. ). sing personal e$perience, try &udging (hich techni1ue suits you best from personal e$perience.

Cha ter / - ,aintaining

T8E GE+E:A< CO+CEPT O2 ,AI+TAI+I+G Ehase $aintenance or >$aintaining? refers to techni4ues that allo& a practitioner to re$ain in the phase for the $a#i$u$ a$ount of ti$e possi"le( -ithout !no(ledge of "maintaining% techni1ues, the duration of the phase (ill be several times shorter than it could other(ise be. The shortest phases last &ust a fe( seconds. 4eginning practitioners usually fear not being able to e$it a phaseI this shouldnDt ever be a concern because the real challenge is being able to maintain the phase state, (hich is easily lost unless phase maintenance techni1ues are used.

Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles+ resisting a return to the (a!eful state F!no(n as a foulG, resisting falling asleep,

and resisting a false e$it from the phase. 0s a rule, the first t(o problems Freturn to a (a!eful state, or falling asleepG are often encountered by beginners, but the third difficulty Ffalse e$itG manifests at later stages of practice. Resistance to returning to the body is self#e$planatory, (hereas resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. 'ot everyone !no(s that almost half of phase e$periences usually end in a 1uite trivial (ay # falling asleep. 0 person usually looses attentiveness, his or her a(areness dissipates, and everything around gradually looses clarity and turns into (hat is for all intents and purposes a usual dream. Resisting a false e$it from the phase is a lot more surprising and dramatic. 3ometimes a practitioner detects an impending e$it from the phase, subse1uent deepening techni1ues fail to (or!, resulting in (hat seems to be a return to the body and physical reality. 3ure that the phase has ended, a practitioner may stand up and the fall asleep after perceiving a fe( steps. In such cases, falling asleep most often happens (ithout any movement, but (hile still lying in bed. The problem is that the difference bet(een the phase and reality can be so subtle that in terms of internal or e$ternal indicators, the phase practically canDt be distinguished from reality. Therefore, one must !no( the necessary actions to ta!e in the event that the phase ceases, since the end of a phase could actually be a tric! and purely imagined. There are specific solutions for the three problems described in addition to general rules that apply to any phase e$perience. 3tudying these rules should be given &ust as high a priority as studying the specific solutions, since only some of them, (hen applied separately, may help one to remain in the phase several times longer than usual. In some cases, techni1ues for maintaining are not applicable. 5o(ever, !no(ledge of ho( to maintain is useful for the ma&ority of e$periences. 0lso, there might be situations (hen someone need only resist a foul, (hile someone else may need to resist falling asleep. 0ll of this is very specific to each case and can be determined only in practice.

-ith perfect !no(ledge of all the techni1ues for maintaining, a phase may last t(o to four minutes, (hich doesnDt sound li!e an e$tended duration, but really is. 0 particularity of the phase space is that achieving something and moving around in it ta!es a minimum amount of time, mere seconds. Thus, so much can be done during 7 minutes in the phase that one literally needs a list, so as not to (aste any time. There are theories that have neither been proven nor disproven claiming that time in the phase contracts and e$pands relative to real time. Thus, one minute of real time (hile in the phase may feel much longer in terms of phase time. Perception of time varies from practitioner to practitioner. 'ovices especially perceive a real minute as more li!e five to 1A minutes in the phase. This is determined by the particularities of individual psychology, state of mind, and the type of events that occur in the phase. In order to understand ho( long a phase really lasted, one does not need to try using a stop(atch in the real (orld. It is better to count ho( many actions too! place in it and ho( much time each of them could have ta!en. The result (ill differ from oneDs first rough estimate several times over. The ma$imum duration the phase varies depends heavily on the ability to apply phase maintenance techni1ues. 3ome practitioners have difficulty brea!ing the t(o#minute barrier (hile some find it easy to remain in the phase for 1A minutes or longer. It is physically impossible to remain in the phase forever because even a )A#minute phase is unheard of. TEC8+I=5ES A+& :5<ES AGAI+ST :ET5:+I+G TO T8E BO&9 Of the follo(ing techni1ues, constant sensory amplification and as#needed sensory amplification are applied the most often (hile performing phase maintenance. 5o(ever, as opposed to other technical elements of phase e$ploration, other secondary techni1ues

of maintaining often become mainstream and the most appropriate for certain individuals. Thus, all the techni1ues should be studied, but the first t(o should be considered very carefully. Constant Sensory A( lification The same sensory amplification described in the chapter on deepening F*hapter <G also applies to "maintaining%. In essence, having achieved the necessary depth of phase, one should not stop to actively agitate his or her perception but should !eep on doing this all the (hile, albeit not as actively as during deepening. The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase, all action should be focused on e$periencing the ma$imum possible amount of tactile#!inesthetic and visual perceptions. This entails constantly touching and e$amining everything in minute detail. 9or e$ample, if passing by a boo!case, touch and e$amine some of the boo!s in it, including their pages and corners. Tactile observation should be performed on every encountered ob&ect. Palpation may be applied separately as a bac!ground sensation. This is done in order not to overload the sense of sight. The hands should be touching something all the time, or better still, rubbing each other. As-+eeded Sensory A( lification 0pplying the as#needed sensory amplification techni1ue is no different than constant sensory amplification. It is used only (hen a foul Fa return to a (a!eful stateG is imminent or (hen phase vision starts to blur and fade. 9or e$ample, (hile traveling in the phase everything may start to blur, signaling a (ea!ening of the phase. 0t this moment, the practitioner should touch every available ob&ectI observe everything in fine detail. 0s soon as returns to a clear and realistic state, actions may be continued (ithout needing to perform amplification. Constant ?ibration

This techni1ue is used to maintain constant, strong vibrations in the phase. 0s previously noted, vibrations are generated by straining the brain or tensing the body (ithout using muscles. Maintaining strong vibrations (ill have a positive effect on the length of the phase. Strengthening ?ibrations as +eeded In this case, vibrations are created and strengthened only if signs of a foul become apparent. ,$amples of foul indicators include duality of perception or blurred vision. 3trengthening vibrations (ill help to deepen the phase, allo(ing a practitioner to stay and continue (ithin the phase. &iving 8eadfirst This techni1ue is the same as the deepening techni1ue of the same name. If a phase is about to dissolve, diving headfirst (ith the eyes shut and a desire to dive as 1uic!ly and deeply as possible. 0s soon as phase depth returns, translocation techni1ues may be used to !eep from arriving at a dead end. 2orced 2alling Aslee 0s soon as indicators of a foul appear, immediately lie do(n on the floor and attempt forced falling asleepI the same as the phase entry techni1ue. 0fter successfully performing the techni1ue F7# 1Asec.G , a practitioner may get up and continue to travel through the phase since the perception of reality and its depth (ill most li!ely be restored. Resist actually fall asleep. :otation If indicators of a foul appear, the practitioner should start rotating around the head#to#feet a$is. nli!e the phase entry techni1ue of the same name, the movement does not have to be imagined. This is an absolutely real rotation in the phase. 0fter several revolutions, depth (ill be restored and actions may be continued. If indicators of a foul persist, rotation should continue until proper depth is achieved.

Counting 6uring the entire phase, count to as large a number possible # not &ust for the sa!e of counting, but (ith a strong desire to reach the highest number possible. *ounting may be performed silently or out loud. This techni1ue (or!s by creating a strong determination to remain in the phase by providing a goal that re1uires action in the phase. <istening in If there are any bac!ground sounds similar to those heard (hile entering the phase # rumbling, (histling, ringing, bu==ing, or si==ling H these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the phase by aggressive attempts at listening in, hearing the entire range of internal sounds. The forced listening in techni1ue may also be used for phase maintenance. 8ooking onto the hase 0nother interesting method of "maintaining% is hoo!ing onto the phase. In the event of an impending foul, grab onto an ob&ect in the phase actively palpate or s1uee=e it. ,ven if a return to the body occurs during this techni1ue, the hands (ill continue to hold the phase ob&ect and the physical hands (ill not be perceived. 4eginning (ith these phantom feelings in the hands, separation from the body is possible. 0ny nearby ob&ect may be hoo!ed+ the leg of a chair, a drin!ing glass, a door!nob, a stone, or a stic!. If there is nothing to grab hold of, clasp the hands together or bite do(n on a lip or the tongue. T(o rules apply to using the techni1ues that help to resist a phase e$it. 9irst of all, never thin! that the phase might end and result in a return to the bodyI thoughts li!e this are li!e programming that immediately send the practitioner to a (a!ened physical state.

3econdly, do not thin! about the physical body. 6oing (ill also instantly return the practitioner to the body, every time.

TEC8+I=5ES A+& :5<ES 2O: :ESISTI+G 2A<<I+G AS<EEP Constant 5nderstanding of the Possibility of 2alling Aslee Most of the time, falling asleep (hile in the phase can be overcome by a constant a(areness that sleep is possible and detrimental to a continued phase. 0 practitioner must al(ays consider the probability of falling asleep and actions must be carefully analy=ed to ensure that they are based on real desires and not on parado$ical notions, (hich are common to dreams. Periodic Analysis of A7areness Periodically as!ing the 1uestion, "0m I dreaming.% (hile in the phase helps appraise situations and the 1uality of the actions being performed at any moment. If everything meets the standards of full phase a(areness, actions may be continued. 0s!ed on a regular basis, this 1uestion becomes habit, automatically used (hile transitioning to the phase state. If you !eep as!ing this 1uestion regularly, sooner or later it (ill arise automatically at the moment (hen you are actually transitioning into a dream. This (ill then help one to (a!e up, after (hich it is possible to continue to remain in a full#fledged phase.. The fre1uency of the 1uestion should be based on a practitionerDs ability to consistently remain in the phase. If a phase usually lasts five to 1A minutes or more, it is not necessary to as! the 1uestion more than once every ) minutesI other(ise, this 1uestion has to be as!ed fre1uently, literally once a minute, or &ust a little less often. There is another important rule related to resisting falling asleep+ no practitioner should engage or participate in spontaneous events occurring in the phase. ,vents that are not planned or deliberate lead to a high probability of being immersed in the side action, (hich results in a loss of concentrated a(areness.

TEC8+I=5ES AGAI+ST A+ 5+:ECOG+IBE& P8ASE 3ince the techni1ues of testing the realness of the end of the phase are a little absurd and demand additional attention to actions, they should only be used in those cases (hen they are indeed re1uired. ntil then, one should simply bear them in mind and use them only in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely determine (hether or not the practitioner is in the phase (hen using techni1ues for entering it. 8y er-concentration 3ince the cessation of the phase e$perience may be simulated and no different in terms of perception from a real e$it, differences bet(een the physical (orld and the phase (orld must be actively discerned. In other (ords, a practitioner must !no( ho( to determine (hether a genuine phase e$it has occurred. 0t present, only one e$periment is !no(n to guarantee an accurate result. The phase space cannot (ithstand prolonged close visual attention to the minute details of ob&ects. -ithin several seconds of acute e$amination, shapes begin to distort, ob&ects change color, produce smo!e, melt, or morph in other (ays. 0fter e$iting the phase, loo! at a small ob&ect from a distance of four to si$ inches, and remain focused on it for 1A seconds. If the ob&ect does not change, a practitioner can be assured that the surroundings are reality. If an ob&ect is someho( distorted or as!e(, a practitioner !no(s that the phase is intact. The simplest option is to loo! at the tip of the finger since it is al(ays close at hand. It is also possible to ta!e a boo! and e$amine its te$t. Te$t in the phase (ill either blur or appear as alphabetical gibberish, or full of incomprehensible symbols. Au-iliary techni$ues There are a variety of other procedures to test the occurrence of a foul. 5o(ever, since any situation, any property, or any function can

be simulated in the phase, these procedures are not al(ays applicable. 9or e$ample, some suggest that it is sufficient to attempt doing something that is realistically impossible, and, if a practitioner is in the phase, the impossible action (ill be possible. The problem (ith this suggestion is that the la(s of the physical (orld may be simulated in the phase, so flying, passing through (alls or tele!inesis may not be possible, even in the deepest phase. It has also been suggested that loo!ing at a cloc! t(ice in a ro( may help a practitioner determine (hether or not the phase is intactI allegedly, the cloc! (ill display a different time each time it is observed. 5ere again, the cloc!Ds display may not change in the phase. Of all the au$iliary procedures, one deserves mention and (or!s in the ma&ority of cases+ searching for differences from reality in the surroundings. 0lthough the usual surroundings of a practitioner may be 1AAJ accurately simulated in the phase, it is very rare. Therefore, it is possible to figure out (hether a phase is intact by carefully e$amining the room (here everything is ta!ing place. In the phase, there (ill be something e$tra or something (ill be missingI the time of day or even the season (ill be different from reality, and so on. 9or e$ample, (hen verifying (hether a foul occurred, a room may be missing the table supporting a television set, or the table may be there, but be a different color. GE+E:A< :5<ES 2O: ,AI+TAI+I+G The rules for maintaining the phase deal (ith resisting all or most of the problems (hich cause a phase to end. 3ome of these rules are capable of increasing the length of stay in the phase by many times and must be follo(ed. The practitioner should not loo+ into the distance( If fara(ay ob&ects are observed for a long period of time, a foul may occur, or one may be translocated to(ards these ob&ects. In order to loo! at distant ob&ects (ithout problems, a practitioner has to employ techni1ues for maintaining. 9or e$ample, from time to time the

practitioner should loo! at his hands, rub them against each other, or maintain strong vibrations. :onstant activity( nder no circumstances should a practitioner remain passive and calm in the phase. The more actions performed, the longer the phase is. The fe(er actions H the shorter the phase. It is enough to pause for thought, and everything stops. Elan of action( There should be a clear plan of action consisting of at least ; tas!s to be carried out in the phase at the earliest opportunity. This is necessary for several important reasons. 9irst, the practitioner must not pause in the phase to thin! about "(hat to do ne$t%, (hich fre1uently results in a foul. 3econd, having a plan, the practitioner (ill subconsciously perform all of the actions necessary for staying in and maintaining the phase to carry out all the tas!s that have been planned. Third, intelligent and pre#planned actions permit focused advancement of purposeful actions versus (asting phase e$periences on (hatever comes to mind at a given moment. 9ourth, a plan of action creates necessary motivation and, conse1uently, pronounced intent to perform the techni1ues to enter the phase. Stopping the -3( The less Internal 6ialogue FI6G and reflection that occurs in the phase, the longer it lasts. 0ll thin!ing must be concentrated on (hat is being achieved and perceived. Tal!ing to oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is that many thoughts may act as programming in the phase and even announcing them internally may introduce alterations, including negative ones. 9or e$ample, thin!ing about the body cause a return to it. The practitioner may also get lost in thought, (hich (ill lead to a foul. 0lso, sporadic thoughts usually and 1uite easily cause the practitioner to simply fall asleep. % practitioner $ust try to re-enter the phase after e#periencing a foul( 0l(ays remember that a typical phase e$perience consists of several repeated entries and e$its. ,ssentially, in most cases it is possible to re#enter the phase through the use of separation or phase state creation techni1ues immediately after returning to the body. If the practitioner has &ust left the phase, the brain is still close to it and

appropriate techni1ues may be applied in order to continue the &ourney. T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )IT8 ,AI+TAI+I+G 9orgetting to try to re#enter the phase after it is over, although doing so greatly helps to increase number of e$periences had. 3taying focused on techni1ues for "maintaining% instead of performing them as bac!ground tas!s. 2etting distracted by events and dropping phase maintenance techni1ues instead of continually performing (hatDs needed to maintain the phase. 3uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary (hen the phase appears very deep and stable, even though these could be false sensations. sing the necessary techni1ues too late. 3topping due to uncertainty about further actions, (hile there must al(ays be a plan. 9orgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase (ithout reali=ing it. Recogni=ing the ris! of falling asleep must be a primary focus. 2etting pulled into events occurring in the phase instead of observing and controlling them from the outside. 9orgetting that techni1ues for "maintaining% must al(ays be used to remain in as deep a phase as possible, and not &ust for maintaining any odd state. 3topping the use of techni1ues for "maintaining% during contact (ith living ob&ects, (hen the techni1ues must be used constantly. *ounting (ithout the desire to count as high as possible. Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation. Passiveness and calmness instead of constant activity. ,$cessive thin!ing and internal dialogue (hen these should be !ept to an absolute minimum.

E-ercises for Cha ter /

=uestions 1. -hat is a foul. ). -hat is the minimum duration of the phase. 7. -hat do phase maintenance F"maintaining%G techni1ues counteract besides fouls and falling asleep. :. -hy might a practitioner thin! that the phase has ended (hen it actually is still in progress. ;. 3hould "maintaining% techni1ues al(ays be used. <. -hat primary techni1ues (or! against the occurrence of fouls. >. 5o( can a practitioner hoo! onto the phase. ?. -hile in the phase, (hat do thoughts about the body lead to. @. -hat 1uestion should be as!ed in the phase in order to reduce the probability of falling asleep. 1A. -hat happens to an ob&ect during hyper#concentration. 11. 5o( else, apart from hyper#concentration, might a practitioner effectively recogni=e a false foul. 1). -hile in the phase, is it permitted to loo! into the distance for a long time. 17. -hat is I6 and ho( does the degree of it affect the duration of a phase e$perience. 1:. -hat should a practitioner al(ays do after an inadvertent return into the body. Tasks 1. 6uring the ne$t fe( phases, dedicate yourself to the single goal of maintaining as long as possible, using as many maintaining techni1ues as you can. ). 9igure out (hich techni1ues have proven the most effective and comfortable for you, so that you may use these later. 7. Increase the duration of your average phase to at least 7 minutes Fevaluated ob&ectivelyG.

Cha ter 0 - Pri(ary skills

T8E ESSE+CE O2 P:I,A:9 S>I<<S -hen dealing (ith a fully#reali=ed phase, re1uisite !no(ledge is not limited to entry techni1ues, deepening and maintenance of the state, translocation, or finding and interacting (ith ob&ects. In order to feel comfortable, a practitioner has to master or at least acclimate himself (ith a (hole series of techni1ues to correctly react in any number of situations. 9or e$ample, a practitioner needs to !no( ho( to create vision, if it is absent. 0ctions including passage through a (all or ta!ing flight in a deep phase do not happen easily, although these actions may be assumed natural occurrences, since the phase e$ists apart from the physical (orld. In addition to techni1ues that allo( interaction (ith the physical setting and surroundings of the phase, methods must learned and applied to counteract fear if it forces a practitioner to consciously and consistently leave the phase. 0 practitioner does not have to !no( all the primary s!ills by heart, but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of them+ emergency return, creation of vision, translocation through ob&ects, contact (ith animate ob&ects, and, for many, s!ills dedicated to fighting fear (ill also prove e$tremely relevant. The final choice of methods that re1uire added focus on the part of the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal e$periences and problems faced (hile in the phase, since different practitioners often have completely different types of problems. &ISCE:+I+G T8E P8ASE

Problems (ith phase identification during entry often arise at the initial stages of studying the phase. 0 practitioner simply cannot understand (hether or not he or she is already in the phase. This uncertainty can manifest (hile lying do(n or (hile practicing in other postures. If a practitioner is simply lying do(n, physically perceiving his o(n body, and doing nothing, then it is indeed difficult to determine (hether or not he is present in the phase. It is sufficient to note that there might be no signs of a phase state. On the contrary, there may be a host of signs and unusual sensations, but they by no means necessarily indicate the onset of the phase. The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is al(ays solved through actions. If the practitioner is lying do(n, then standard separation techni1ues may produce indication of phase achievement # in the ma&ority of cases H since such techni1ues may often be incorrectly performed. It is possible to perform techni1ues that are only achievable in the phase state. If a practitioner stands up and does not recogni=e his surroundings, then it can be assumed that the practitioner is standing up in the phase. 5o(ever, often based on the observation that "everything is as in reality%, a practitioner may stand up and note that everything is in fact "as in reality% simply because the practitioner is still in "reality%. In ans(er to this dilemma, the phenomenon of hyper#concentration has been previously mentioned in relation to maintaining phase. 4y using hyper#concentration, it is al(ays possible to ascertain (hether the practitioner is in the phase. 5o(ever, as a rule, hyper#concentration is rarely necessary. Most often, the follo(ing signs indicate that separation has occurred in the phase+ unusual sensations in the body during movement, e$treme tightness during movement, a strong physical urge to lie bac! do(n, dis&ointedness of surroundings, and blurred or complete absence of vision. Often, the problem resides in the use of direct techni1ues (here the practitioner e$pects fast results and attempts to determine (hether the phase has been achieved. 0s a principle this should not be done.

-hen using direct techni1ues, the phase manifests itself clearlyI therefore, if an attempt to determine its presence is made, it is an indicator that the phase is 1uite li!ely still far off. E,E:GE+C9 :ET5:+D PA:A<9SIS 3tatistics sho( that in one#third of initial phase e$periences, a practitioner is faced (ith a degree of fear that forces a return to the body. Periodically, even e$perienced practitioners face situations that re1uire an abrupt return to (a!efulness. This presents a number of concerns. In and of itself, returning to the body is almost al(ays unproblematicI remembering and thin!ing about the body often suffices and (ithin moments the practitioner is returned to the body from (hatever location in the phase. 0dmittedly, it is advisable during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain from touching anything. 0s a rule, (hen these actions are performed, simply standing up in the physical (orld is all that is re1uired to complete a returnI ho(ever, this is not al(ays simply achieved. 3ometimes after reentering the body, the practitioner suddenly reali=es that physical functionality has ceased due to the onset of sleep paralysis, or the sensation that the body has been s(itched off. 6uring sleep paralysis, it is impossible to scream, call for help, or even move a finger. In the ma&ority of cases, it is also impossible to open the eyes. 9rom a scientific point of vie(, this is a case of an abrupt, unnatural interruption of the rapid eye movement FR,MG phase of sleep, during (hich this paralysis is al(ays present, and it can persist for some time after the phase is interrupted. This is (here it gets interesting. People in the physical (orld are accustomed to an important rule+ if you (ish to achieve something, then do it, and do it as actively as possible. This rule, though good, is not al(ays applicable to certain conditions lin!ed to the phase, and applies least of all to e$iting the phase. 3ometimes e$treme effort ma!es it possible to brea! through sleep paralysis and resume movement, though most of these efforts tend to e$acerbate immobility.

6ue to the unusual nature of a negative situation follo(ing a deliberate, fear#induced return to the body, the depth of the phase may greatly increase because of the bodyDs natural, protective inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral corte$I this results in even greater agitation, greater fear. The paralysis gro(s stronger. This is a vicious circle that leads to unpleasant feelings and emotions, (hich may evaporate any desire to practice the phase. Ignorance of correct procedures has led to the (idespread opinion that such adverse situations may ma!e it impossible to come bac! from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is, therefore, dangerous to get involved (ith the practice. 5o(ever, the solution to this problem rests in very simple actions and procedures that can prevent a large number of negative e$periences+ Co( lete :ela-ation In the section on deepening and maintaining, it (as noted that the more active a practitioner is (hile in the phase, the better. *onversely, if there is less activity, the 1uality of the phase declines, allo(ing for an easy e$it. Thus, in order to leave the phase, the practitioner only needs to completely rela$ and ignore any perceived sensations, actions, or thoughts. 0 practitioner may also recite a prayer, mantra, or rhyme, since that helps the consciousness to be distracted from the situation more 1uic!ly. Of course, one needs to calm do(n and try to get rid of the fear, (hich in and of itself is capable of !eeping such a state going. Periodically, the practitioner should try to move a finger in order to chec! (hether attempts at rela$ation have had an effect. Concentration on a 2inger 0 practitioner e$periencing sleep paralysis should try moving a finger or a toe. 0t first this (onDt (or!, but the practitioner has to concentrate precise thought and effort on the action. 0fter a little (hile, the physical finger (ill begin to move. The problem (ith this techni1ue is that the practitioner may accidentally start ma!ing phantom motions instead of physical movements, (hich is (hy an

understanding of the difference bet(een the t(o sensations is necessary, since it is often not very obvious.

Concentration on Possible ,ove(ents The physiology of sleep paralysis, the phase state, and dreams are such that (hen the practitioner is in one of these states, some actions are al(ays associated (ith movements made in the real body. This is true (hen moving the eyeballs, the tongue, or (hile breathing. If the practitioner concentrates attention on these processes, it is possible counteract inhibitions to physical movementI as a result, a sleep# paraly=ed practitioner (ill become able to move in reality. :eevaluating the Situation nder normal circumstances, deliberate e$it from the phase is not the norm. 6eliberate e$it is commonly caused by certain fears and pre&udices. If a practitioner is not able to activate the body using other emergency return techni1ues, a careful consideration the possibilities offered by the phase is recommended. There are many interesting and useful things that can be e$perienced in the phase. -hy ruin the possibility of great opportunity because of a baseless fear. To be fair, it must be noted that emergency e$it techni1ues do not al(ays (or!. 0s a rule, after a long period of sleep deprivation, or at the beginning of or in the middle of a nightDs sleep, the urge to sleep is so great that it is difficult to resist the sleep paralysis phenomenon. In this respect, reevaluating the situation is highly recommended so that a practitioner is able to ta!e advantage of the situation versus suffering by it. 3leep paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state by means of indirect techni1ues. By the &ay, +no&ing ho& to e#it paralysis is i$portant not only for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs even &ithout the phase for appro#i$ately one-third of the hu$an population at least once in a lifeti$e( -t usually happens "efore or after sleep( 2IG8TI+G 2EA:

9ear in the phase is a very common occurrence. The practitioner may e$perience fear at any stage, although it is e$pressed much more clearly during initial practice. The causes of fear are very diverse+ a feeling that returning to the body is impossibleI a fear of deathI (orrying that something bad is going to happen to the bodyI encountering something scary and terrible in the phaseI painful sensationsI overly sharp, hyper#realistic sensations. One fear dominates all others+ the instinct of self#preservation, (hich, (ithout any apparent reason, can induce a feeling of absolute horror H a feeling that cannot be e$plained or controlled. 9or a novice stric!en by insurmountable fear that causes paralysis, there is only one (ay to gradually overcome. ,ach time a novice enters the phase, an attempt should be made to go a step further than the previous time. 9or e$ample, in spite of feeling terrified, the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then move them bac! to the initial position. The second time, the practitioner should attempt to sit do(n. The third time, standing up should be attempted. The fourth time, (al!ing around in the phase is advised. Then, after incremental steps to(ard e$periencing the harmlessness of the phase state, productive, calm action may ensue. Interesting fact! Fear itself can "e used to enter the phase and re$ain there for a long ti$e( Once fears are allayed, a cal$ed practitioner is e#periences increased difficulty &ith entry into the phase( 9or a practitioner (ho faces periodical fears, reali=ing that there is no real danger encourages progress in practice. rges to rapidly return to the body are then made baseless. 3ooner or later, calmer thought dominates events in the phase, and fear happens less often. -hen dealing (ith momentary fear caused by events in the phase, the simplest solution is to tac!le it head#on and follo( through to the end in order to avoid a fear#driven precedent. If a practitioner al(ays runs a(ay from undesirable events, the events (ill occur more and more fre1uently. If a practitioner is incapable of facing fear in the

phase, it is best to use the translocation techni1ue to travel else(here, although this solution only produces temporary relief.

C:EATIO+ O2 ?ISIO+ 8ision is often available at the very beginning of a phase, especially (hen the practitioner uses image observation and visuali=ation techni1ues to enter. 3ometimes vision appears (ithin the first fe( seconds. Other times, it manifests during the deepening process. 5o(ever, there are cases (here vision is not available and must be created 1uic!ly, at any cost. 8ision may arrive as soon as it is thought about, but if this does not occur, a special techni1ue is necessary. To create vision, a practitioner needs to bring the hands four to si$ inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them through the grayness or dar!ness. Peering aggressively and attentively at the minute details of the palms (ill cause them to appear, much li!e they are being developed on Polaroid film. 0fter several seconds, vision (ill become clear, and along (ith the palms, the surroundings (ill also become visible. nder no circumstances should the physical eyelids be opened. 8ision (ill appear on its o(n and (ill not differ from that of reality and the physical sensation of opened eyes (ill emerge. It is possible to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite number of times, even (ithout having opened them at all, since the latter is not needed for creating vision. The physical eyelids may be open only (hile e$periencing a very deep phase. In a shallo( phase, opening the eyes (ill cause a return to (a!efulness. The practitioner must also !eep in mind that vision should only be created after a complete separation from the body and a subse1uent translocation has been achieved. 0ttempting to vie( the hands during flight or (hile hovering in an unidentified space leads to arbitrary translocation. CO+TACT )IT8 <I?I+G OBGECTS T(o problems may surface (hile conversing (ith animate ob&ects in the phase+ silence or a return to the body. In vie( of the fact that

many phase applications are based on contact (ith people for one purpose or another, it is necessary to understand ho( to correctly manage contact (ith living ob&ects. In order to avoid a foul Fe&ection from the phase into realityG, the elementary rules of "maintaining% must be observed. 0ctively observing the facial features or clothing of a person you (ant to communicate (ith. -hile communicating, the practitioner should constantly rub the hands together or maintain strong vibrations by straining the brain. Remember to perform the techni1ues to avoid becoming absorbed in communication. 0 more comple$ problem is overcoming the communicative unresponsiveness of ob&ects in the phase. In many cases, the speech of an ob&ect is bloc!ed by the internal stress of the practitioner. 3ometimes the problem stems from an e$pectation that an ob&ect (ill not be able to communicate in the phase. It is important to treat the ob&ects in a calm manner. There is no use trying to shout or beat the ob&ect to force communication. On the contrary, it is much more effective to treat the ob&ect gently, (ithout applying pressure. 6o not peer at an ob&ectDs mouth, e$pecting sounds to emerge. It is better to loo! else(hereI ta!ing a passive interest in communication generally yields the best results. 0s a rule, the first time that communication (ith a living ob&ect is successful, future attempts go unhindered. *ommunication methods in the phase are should be no different than those used in ordinary life+ tal!ing, facial e$pressions, gesturing (ith the hands, body language. Telepathy is not necessary. :EA&I+G Reading te$t in the phase may be accompanied by a number of difficulties. 9irst, small print becomes illegible because the affects of hyper#concentration may distort te$t. This problem is solved by using large#font te$tual sources of information. 9or e$ample, the te$t of a normal boo! blurs (hen observed too attentively, but the large font

on the cover of a boo! is easily read since its si=e is sufficient for rapid reading (ithout detailed scrutiny. The second problem encountered (hile reading in the phase is (hen te$t is legible but is completely meaningless in compositionI gibberish. This problem is solved by turning over the pages, loo!ing for a readable message. It is also possible to find another copy or create it ane( using the ob&ect#finding techni1ues. The same applies to cases (here the te$t is seen as a set of incomprehensible symbols or signs. -hile reading in the phase, the practitioner should not forget about performing "maintaining% techni1ues to prevent a foul by becoming too rela$ed. ?IB:ATIO+S The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably unusual sensation that may be used successfully to enter, deepen or maintain the phase. It is difficult to describe it better than the sensation of a heavy current passing through the entire body (ithout causing any pain. It may also feel li!e the (hole body is contracting, or a tingling sensation similar to numbness. Most often, the sensations are similar to high#fre1uency vibrations of the body, (hich e$plains the origin of the term "vibration%. If the practitioner is not sure (hether or not he e$perienced vibrations, then there is a good method to solve his problem+ if he really did, he (ill not have any doubts about it. In all other cases, (hen there are doubts and uncertainty, the practitioner is definitely not dealing (ith vibrations, or is dealing (ith another form thereof. If you have e$perienced vibrations at least once, the recollection of these sensations helps greatly during the simultaneous application of indirect techni1ues. They are created, supported and strengthened by straining the brain or tensing the body (ithout using the muscles. 9or vibrations to appear, it often suffices merely to thin! about them. 6uring the first e$perience, one should e$periment (ith them for a

(hile by rolling them around the body and its parts, as (ell as strengthening and (ea!ening them. 0o&ever, one should not thin+ that the presence of vi"rations is a necessary condition for "eing in the phase( Many novices often strive not for the phase but for vibrations, after (hich the former must supposedly follo(. That should not be the case. There are indeed specific techni1ues that ma!e it possible to get into the phase by creating vibrations, but in all other cases they are not necessary and some practitioners may never have them at all. TEC8+I=5ES 2O: T:A+S<OCATI+G T8:O5G8 OBGECTS In a deep phase, the properties of the surrounding environment become very similar to the physical (orld. 5o(ever, it may sometimes be necessary to pass through a (all or translocate to avoid a physical barrier in the phase. There are t(o basic options for passing through barriers li!e (alls. sually, mastering these re1uires several attempts. Interesting fact! -f a practitioner concentrates on the physical sensations associated &ith passing through a &all, it is possi"le to get stuc+( % practitioner $ay even e#perience the feeling of o"structed "reathing &hen this happens( %t such a ti$e it is necessary to return to the "ody( :a id &efocused Penetration Run or &ump at a (all (ith a burning desire to penetrate it. 6onDt focus on the (allI instead concentrate on the immediate surroundings. 6o not try to ta!e anything from the current location since this may impede a successful passage through the (all. The Closed Eyes Techni$ue

-hen approaching a (all, the practitioner must close his eyes and completely focus on a desire to pass through it (hile imagining that the (all does not e$ist, or that it is transparent and penetrable. 3urface resistance should be pressed through, continuing on (ith the aggressive desire and concentration. 2<IG8T Ta!ing flight in the phase is a simple matter of remembering past dreams of flight. 'othing needs to be tensed, no (ord need to be said. 0ttempting flight (ith closed eyes produces a high rate of success, but presents an increased probability of inadvertent translocation. If a flight attempt is unsuccessful, a practitioner may try &umping from a high elevation or from a (indo(. The natural instinct of dream flight ta!es over and the fall becomes a controlled flight. 5o(ever, &umping from (indo(s or other elevations is advisable only to practitioners (ith e$perience, since novices may not al(ays be able to determine (hether they are in the phase or in reality. 0nother (ay to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air (hen &umping up. S5PE:-ABI<ITIES The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on the ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the physical (orld. It is important to remember that only a practitionerDs apprehension places limits on (hat may be done in the phase. 9or e$ample, if a practitioner needs to get to a location # even very far a(ay # it may be reached by teleportation. If an ob&ect needs to be moved from one side of the room to the other, it may be moved by tele!inesis. One of the ma&or benefits of the phase e$perience is unencumbered freedom of action. To master unusual abilities, only a fe( phases need to be spent in concentrated development of the methods.

Telekinesis In order to learn tele!inesis Fmoving ob&ect by thoughtG, the practitioner concentrate on an ob&ect (hile e$periencing a deepened phase, and attempt to move the ob&ect by thin!ing about the movement. The only re1uired action is aggressive visuali=ation of the ob&ectDs movement. 'o specific e$ternal actions are re1uired. Tele!inetic ability is inherent to every human being. If attempts are unsuccessful at first, press on. 4efore too long, the full effect of the practitionerDs (ill yield results. sing this ability helps to encourage a good phase e$perience by providing a tool for carrying out planned tas!s. Pyrokinesis Igniting an ob&ect in the phase &ust by staring at it re1uires a strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob&ect. Performed successfully, an ob&ect (ill smo!e, distort, dar!en and then burst into flames. Tele athy To develop telepathy in the phase, it is necessary to peer at animate ob&ects (hile listening surrounding e$ternal and internal sounds (ith the intention of hearing thoughts e$pressed by thought. ,ven e$perienced practitioners encounter difficulty (hile developing telepathy, but (hen successful, contact (ith people in the phase is substantially simplified. sing telepathy, discerning the thoughts of people, animals, and ob&ects is possible. 5o(ever, this should not be ta!en too seriously, since it is merely the nature of the phase to simulate (hat is e$pected. Trans(utation Transforming an ob&ectDs form re1uires the techni1ue of transmutation Frefer to *hapter @G. It should also be noted that if the goal is not to convert something but rather to transform oneself, then it is necessary to use the translocation techni1ues Falso described in

*hapter @G, (hereby attention has to be concentrated not on the desired place but on the desired form. 5ere again there are no limitations apart from individual courage and fantasy. It is possible to become a butterfly or a dinosaur. It is possible to become a bird or a (orm. ItDs even possible to become a child or a person of the opposite se$. These are not simply e$ternal changes, but real transmutations, (ithin and (ithout. If a practitioner becomes a butterfly, it accompanies the sensation of having (ings, many legs, and an unusual body. The practitioner (ill intuitively !no( ho( to control each part of this ne( body. This is a superficial description of the transmutation e$perience, (hich obviously defies a customary understanding of reality. T8E I,PO:TA+CE O2 CO+2I&E+CE 0 crucial factor in developing phase abilities is self#confidence in the ability to use the s!ills. Initially, these abilities are absent because the human brain, tuned in to ordinariness, bloc!s confidence in the ability to do anything unusual. 0s soon as strong confidence is reached in the performance of phase abilities, all others become easy to achieve. 0lthough confidence in phase abilities may gro( strong, practitioners should remain soundly a(are that abilities in the phase are limited to the phase. 0ttempting tele!inesis, pyro!inesis, or transmutation in the real (orld is a (aste of time and energy. CO+T:O<<I+G PAI+ 0long (ith all the positive e$periences and sensations that may be en&oy in the phase, painful e$periences nature may also manifest. Punching a (all in a deep phase state (ill cause the same pain as if a (all had been struc! in physical reality. 3ome actions in the phase may unavoidably cause unpleasant feelings of painI therefore, it is necessary to !no( ho( to avoid painful actions. 9ocusing on an internal confidence that pain (ill not

result from an action (ill alleviate the problem. 0 practitioner may e$periment (ith this type of focus by pummeling a (all (hile resolving that there is no pain. If the e$periment succeeds, then obtaining the same result (ill never again re1uire the same level of effortI thin!ing that the phase is painless (ill suffice. ,O:A< STA+&A:&S I+ T8E P8ASE 9rom the very beginning, it should be understood that the moral compass of phase space has nothing in common (ith the properties and la(s in the physical (orld that promulgate reality. The phase space seemingly imitates the physical (orld (ith all its properties and functions only because (e are used to perceiving it and are not e$pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules apply only to the place (here these have been. It does not ma!e sense to follo( the same rules (hile in the phase. The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in the phase because some (ould be unacceptable, improper, or bad in the real (orld. These are merely behavioral patterns that are unfounded in the (orld of the phase, (here everything operates on the basis of entirely different la(s. The only moral rules that might e$ist in the phase are those that the practitioner establishes. If desired, complete, unhindered freedom may be e$perienced. ST5&9I+G POSSIBI<ITIES A+& SE+SATIO+S 'ovice practitioners should not immediately rush to(ards a single specific goal if long#term practice is desired. It is better to e$tensively investigate the phase and its surroundings before focusing on accomplishment. This (ill build intimacy (ith the e$perience and allo( unhindered entry and interaction (ith the phase. 0s in reality, learning (hatever first reveals itself is the !ey to increasing and speciali=ing !no(ledge. 0 beginning practitioner

should at first en&oy the simple fact of actually being in the phase, then lean its details and functions. Once inside the phase, a practitioner should e$plore it, e$amining and interacting (ith everything encountered. 5e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings in the phase in order to fully understand ho( unusual the phase is in its realism. 0 practitioner must e$perience movement+ (al!ing, running, &umping, flying, falling, s(imming. Test the sensations of pain by stri!ing a (all (ith a fist. The simplest (ay to e$perience taste sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to eat everything that you find there, at the same time not forgetting to smell each item. -al! through the (alls, translocate, create and handle ob&ects. ,$plore. 0ll these actions are very interesting in and of themselves. The possibilities really are infinite. 5o(ever, only (hen they are (ell understood and thoroughly e$plored can it be said that the practitioner really !no(s (hat the phase is about. T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )IT8 P:I,A:9 S>I<<S -hen trying to discern (hether or not a phase is intact, a &udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical environment. In the phase, physical attributes are simulations. 5yper#concentrating on an ob&ect for too short a time (hile trying to determine (hether the surroundings are in the phase or in the physical (orld. 6eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely (hen the entire natural length of the phase should be ta!en advantage of. Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm, rela$ed action. Refusal to practice the phase because of fear, though this problem is temporary and resolvable. Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this fre1uently leads to a foul. Premature attempts to create vision in the phase, (hereas separating from the body and deepening should occur.

 ,$cessive haste (hile creating vision although in the ma&ority of cases vision appears naturally. -hile concentrating on the hands to create vision, doing so at an e$cessive distance versus the recommended four to si$ inches. 9orgetting about the techni1ues for "maintaining% (hile in contact (ith living ob&ects. 9orgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing vision (hen translocating through (alls or other solid ob&ects. 6esiring to do something superhuman in the phase (ithout the re1uired internal desire and confidence. 9ear of e$periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to control it. Observing moral standards in the phase (hen they do not apply. 0 tendency to immediately use the phase for something practical instead of first thoroughly e$ploring and interacting (ith the surroundings.

E-ercises for Cha ter 0

=uestions 1. 0re there s!ills in the phase that must first be mastered before the phase may be used to its full e$tent. ). Is it possible to understand (hether a phase is intact by attempting to fly. 7. 5as a practitioner most li!ely gotten up in the phase or in reality if there are doubts about this. :. Is it sufficient to thin! about the body in order to return to it, and is it only re1uired to return into the body in order to control it. ;. -hich arm should be actively and aggressively moved to overcome sleep paralysis. <. Is it possible to tell &o!es to oneself to overcome sleep paralysis. >. Is it possible to move the physical eyes (hile in the phase.

?. -hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be overcome. @. *an sleep paralysis occur (ithout practicing the phase. 1A. -hat if fear is not addressed and con1uered. 11. Is it possible to gradually master the phase in order to overcome fear. 1). Is there cause for fear of anything in the phase. 17. 0t (hat point can vision be created in the phase by opening the eyelids and not through the use of special techni1ues. 1:. -hat (ould happen (ith an attempt to open the eyes after sitting up in bed, i.e., before becoming completely separated from the phase. 1;. -hy may contact (ith living ob&ects in the phase cause a return to the body. 1<. -hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the mouth of a tal!ing ob&ect. 1>. In the phase, ho( 1uic!ly can small te$t be read. 1?. -hich is easier to read in the phase+ te$t in a ne(spaper or te$t on a large billboard. 1@. Is it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te$t (hile reading in the phase. )A. Is it possible to burst through a (all after running up to it (ith the eyes shut. )1. -hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying in the phase. )). 0re there any e$trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in the phase. )7. *an a practitioner transform into a ball (hile in the phase. ):. 5o( does pain in the phase differ from pain in the physical (orld. );. 3hould a practitioner give up a seat to an elderly person (hile in the phase. )<. 6ue to moral considerations, (hat is prohibited in the phase. Tasks

1. 6uring your ne$t phase session, (al! around your home investigating the rooms, !itchen, and bathroom in detail. ). /earn to pass through (alls. *ompletely dedicate one long phase e$perience to perfecting this s!ill. 7. /earn to fly in the phase. :. -hile in a deep phase, learn to control pain by hitting a (all (ith your fist. ;. -hile in the phase, learn tele!inesis Fthe ability to move ob&ects by thoughtG and pyro!inesis Fsetting ob&ects on fire, also performed by thoughtG. <. 6edicate a lengthy phase e$perience to an e$periment (ith vision+ create it if it is not already available, and then shut your eyes and recreate vision. 6o this at least ten times over the course of a single phase >. 2et ob&ects in the phase to start tal!ing. ?. 6edicate a long phase to searching for different !inds of te$ts in order to e$periment (ith reading various si=e fonts.

Cha ter 1 - Translocation and 2inding Ob3ects

T8E ESSE+CE O2 T:A+S<OCATIO+ A+& 2I+&I+G OBGECTS /i!e everyday reality, the phase space cannot be used for certain purposes if it is not !no(n ho( to move around and find necessary things. In a (a!eful state, it is more or less !no(n (here something is located and ho( to reach it. In the phase the same assumptions cannot apply since phase mechanisms (or! by different principles. The reason for addressing translocation and finding ob&ects in the same chapter is because both techni1ues rely on the same mechanics that ma!e the e$istence of these techni1ues possible. In other (ords, the same methods # (ith minor e$ceptions # can be applied to both translocation and finding. 0fter studying the techni1ues described in this chapter, a practitioner in the phase (ill be able to go to any location and find any ob&ect. The only limitations that e$ist are those of the imagination and desireI if these are unlimited, so are the possibilities. Regarding translocation, attention should not be focused on methods for travelling through nearby spaces. 9or e$ample, a practitioner may simply (al! into an ad&acent room, or out to the street via the corridor or through the (indo(. These are natural, easy actions. 0 practitioner should instead concentrate attention on ho( to move to remote destinations that cannot be 1uic!ly reached by physical means. It is important to mention the necessary safety procedures for translocation. 3ometimes, due to a lac! of e$perience, a practitioner may mista!e the phase for reality, and reality may be mista!en for the

phase. Mista!ing the phase for reality implies no danger since a practitioner simply believes that an entry attempt (as unsuccessful. 5o(ever, if reality is mista!en for the phase, a practitioner may perform dangerous or even life#threatening actions. 9or e$ample, after getting out of bed in a (a!eful state, thin!ing that everything is happening in the phase, a beginner may approach a (indo( and &ump out of it, e$pecting to fly, as is customary in the phase. 9or this reason alone, shortcuts to flight should only be ta!en after gaining a level of e$perience that ma!es it possible to unambiguously distinguish the phase from a (a!eful state. If a glitch occurs (hen practicing translocation techni1ues Ffor e$ample, landing in the (rong placeG, a practitioner should simply repeat the techni1ue until the desired result is obtained. ,ither (ay, initial training is a must in order to ma!e everything easier for you later on. 0s far as ob&ect#finding techni1ues are concerned, these are used for both inanimate and animate ob&ects. In other (ords, these techni1ues are e1ually effective for finding, for e$ample, a person or a utensil. 5o(ever, there are several techni1ues that are only suitable for finding living ob&ects. BASIC P:OPE:T9 O2 T8E P8ASE SPACE 0ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a primary la(+ the degree of changeability of the phase space is inversely proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability of its ob&ects. That is, the deeper and more stable the phase, the more difficult it is to perform something unusual in it because in a deep, stable phase, the la(s of it begin to closely resemble those of the physical (orld.

0ll translocation and finding ob&ects techni1ues are based on the !no(ledge of methods that bypass the primary la(. The secret lies in the fact that not only phase depth affects the controllability of the phase, but so does phase stability, (hich in turn depends to a large e$tent on the number of sensations e$perienced in the phase. The techni1ues for translocation and finding ob&ects are used (hen these e$perienced sensations are (ea!ened through certain actions. In other (ords, if a practitioner located in the phase holds a red pencil and e$amines it, tactile and visual perceptions are engaged, (hich under sharp agitation cause the ob&ect to e$ist in its complete form. 5o(ever, as soon as the eyes are shut, the stability of pencil image (ea!ens. In this situation, it (ill be enough for the practitioner Fafter sufficient trainingG to concentrate on believing that the pencil is dar!#blue in order for it to appear dar! blue after opening the eyes. This phenomenon occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer determined by perceptual areas of the brain and, therefore, it is possible to change it. If a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitionerDs eyes are shut, and there is concentration on a thought that the pencil is no

longer on the table, then after opening the eyes, the practitioner (ill find that the pencil has disappeared. In essence, (hen the pencil is lying on the table and the practitionerDs eyes are closed, and the pencil is not being held, no perception is being invested in the pencil, (hich the practitioner deletes using autosuggestion.

sing certain techni1ue#related methods, a practitioner may cause the stability of the phase state to remain in flu$ using techni1ues that best suit the practitionerDs individual personality. TEC8+I=5ES 2O: T:A+S<OCATIO+ Translocation through Tele ortation This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni1ues that beginners should use right a(ay. To apply it, shut the eyes Fif vision is presentG, and then concentrate attention on a thought#form or image of a location else(here in the phase. 0t this moment, there (ill be a string sensation of s(ift flight and (ithin t(o to 1A seconds, the destination (ill be reached. The success of this techni1ue depends on a strong concentration upon a single goal+ the desired location. Practice must be performed very clearly, confidently, aggressively, and (ithout distractions. 0ny unrelated thoughts have a profoundly negative influence on the

performance of this techni1ue. They unnecessarily prolong the flight, cause a foul, or result in arriving at an undesired location. Translocation through a &oor In order to use this techni1ue, approach any door (ith the strong belief that it leads to the re1uired location. 0fter opening the door, the practitioner (ill see and be able to step into the destination. If the door (as originally open, it must be completely shut before applying the techni1ue. 0 dra(bac! to this techni1ue is that its practice al(ays re1uires a door. If there is no door, users of this translocation techni1ue should create one using an ob&ect finding techni1ue. Translocation through Tele ortation 7ith the Eyes O en This techni1ue is difficult because it re1uires an unstable phase space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another location. 6uring teleportation by teleportation (ith eyes shut, the practitioner disengages from the current location. -hereas during teleportation by flight (ith eyes shut the practitioner disentangles himself from the current location, that is not the case here. Therefore, this techni1ue should be used only by e$perienced practitioners (ho are confident that they are capable of remaining in the phase. 0s far as implementing the techni1ue is concerned, the practitioner simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought that he is already present in the desirable location and focus on its image. It is important to not stare at or touch anything during the thought. 3urrounding space (ill dim, blur and then disappear during this time, and then the intended location (ill gradually start to appear. The rate of space metamorphosis depends on the degree of desire to reach the re1uired location. If concentration is (ea! or phase depth is poor, then after space destabili=es, it may not be restored # and a return to the (a!eful state (ill occur. Translocation 7ith Closed Eyes

This is one of the easiest techni1ues. To use this techni1ue, the practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and have an intense desire that, (hen the eyes are ne$t opened, the re1uired location (ill be reached. In order to considerably increase the effectiveness of this techni1ue, it (ould be useful to imagine, at the moment you close your eyes, that you have already reached the desired location. Translocation must occur then, and it has to happen (ithout the flight sensations that occur during teleportation (ith closed eyes. Translocation must occur right then, and it has to happen (ithout the flight that occurs in teleportation (ith closed eyes, (hich must be avoided. Translocation by Concentration on a :e(ote Ob3ect To perform this techni1ue, the practitioner should peer from a distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The greater an intention to see an ob&ectDs detail, the 1uic!er the arrival at the ob&ectDs location. 0 dra(bac! to this techni1ue is that this type of translocation is possible only for places that are already visible, albeit from a great distance. Translocation during Se aration The simplest (ay to translocate is to do so (hile separating from the body. ,mploying this techni1ue is e$tremely simple and very convenient. It may be combined (ith almost any separation techni1ue and is performed by focusing on the image and feel of a desired location during the initial stages of e$iting the body. It is even better to imagine that phase entry (ill occur and separation (ill complete in a chosen location. Interesting fact! %fter having changed his place of residence, the practitioner &ill very often continue for so$e ti$e to separate fro$ the "ody in the sa$e house &here he &as used to doing this previously(

0 dra(bac! of this techni1ue is that separation occurs only in the beginning of the phase e$perience and, therefore, can only be used once. Other options should be considered after the first translocation. Translocation by Passing through a )all This techni1ue is performed by (al!ing or flying through a (all (ith the eyes shut and a firm conviction that the re1uired location is behind the (all. The barrier does not necessarily have to be a (all. It can be any non#transparent ob&ect through (hich a practitioner may (al! or fly+ a screen, a (ardrobe, and so on. The main dra(bac! of this techni1ue is the necessity of appropriate s!ills for penetrating through solid ob&ects of the phase. 0nother necessary condition for applying this techni1ue is the presence of barriers to pass through. Translocation through &iving This techni1ue is identical to passing through (alls (ith the only difference being instead of a (all # (hich may not al(ays be available # the practitioner (ill use the floor or the ground. The practitioner must dive headfirst (ith the eyes shut and have complete confidence that the re1uired location is underneath the solid surface. The ability to pass through solid ob&ects is, naturally, also re1uired. 0 practitioner may dive through the floor or the ground, and also into any flat hori=ontal surface+ a table, a chair, a bed, and so forth. Translocation through :otation 0pply this techni1ue, a practitioner in the phase (ill to start rotating on an a$is (hile simultaneously concentrating on a belief that a desired location (ill be reached once rotation is stopped. The eyes must be shut during the rotation, or vision must not be focused on anything in particular. 0s a rule, t(o to five revolutions on an a$is are sufficient. Once again, everything depends on the ability to fully concentrate on a desired goal (ithout any distractions.

OBGECT 2I+&I+G TEC8+I=5ES Techni$ue of Translocation 0ll translocation techni1ues are also applicable to ob&ect finding techni1ues since the use of both techni1ues re1uires altering the surrounding the space. Instead of concentrating on a location, the practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a space that is to be found or changed. 0s a result, finding the necessary ob&ect Fprovided this techni1ue has been masteredG is guaranteed, but maintaining the original location (here the action begins is not guaranteed. If the goal is to find an ob&ect (hile remaining in the present location, use the speciali=ed techni1ues described later on+ techni1ues that change only a portion of the phase space. 2inding by Calling a +a(e This techni1ue is only used to find living ob&ects. The practitioner must call a person or an animal by name to cause the animate phase resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should be loud, nearly a shout, other(ise it (ill not al(ays (or!. 2enerally, it is often enough to pronounce a name several times to achieve results. If the desired animate ob&ect does not have a name or the practitioner does not !no( it, then any name or general summoning (ill do, li!e, "*ome here!% This should be done (hile mentally focusing on a clear image of the desired person or animal. 2inding by In$uiry To perform this techni1ue, approach any person in the phase and as! him For herG (here to 1uic!ly find a desired ob&ect. 0n accurate ans(er is usually given straight a(ay, and it should be follo(ed. 5o(ever, to avoid (asting time, do not forget to mention that the ob&ect must be found "1uic!ly%, or specify that the ob&ect should be "nearby%. 6uring this communication, under no circumstances should there be a doubt about the accuracy of the information, since other(ise it may lead to a simulation of (hat is e$pected.

The dra(bac! of this techni1ue is that it re1uires the presence of an animate person and good s!ill at communicating (ith ob&ects in the phase, (hich can prove difficult. 2inding by Turning Around In order to use this techni1ue, the practitioner must concentrate and imagine that the re1uired ob&ect is located some(here behind his bac!, and after turning around he (ill actually see it there, even if it (as not there &ust a moment earlier. This (or!s best if the practitioner, prior to turning around, did not vie( the place (here the ob&ect is e$pected to appear. 2inding Around a Corner -hen approaching any corner, concentrate and imagine the re1uired ob&ect is &ust around the corner. Then, after turning the corner, the ob&ect (ill be found. 0nything that limits space visibility may be regarded as a corner. This does not have to be the corner of a house or another type of buildingI it could be the corner of a (ardrobe, the corner of a truc!, etc. The dra(bac! of this techni1ue is that it re1uires the availability of a sufficiently large corner that bloc!s the vie( of anything around the other side of it. 2inding in the 8and This techni1ue is, in essence, only applicable to finding ob&ects that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this techni1ue, concentrate on the idea that the ob&ect is already in hand. 0t that moment, the practitioner must not loo! at it. 3oon after beginning to concentrate on this idea, the practitioner (ill at first feel a slight sensation of the ob&ect lying in his hand, follo(ed by a full sensation and appearance of the desired ob&ect. 2inding by Trans(utation This techni1ue distorts the phase space (hile not completely disengaging a perception of the space. The practitioner must give

strong attention to a thought that a re1uired ob&ect is going to appear in a desired location. There must be sufficient confidence that the practitionerDs desires (ill be reali=ed. 0t this moment, the process of metamorphosis (ill begin+ space (ill distort and dim, and the re1uired ob&ect (ill begin to manifest itself. 0fter this, brightness and focus (ill be restored (ith necessary alterations made present in the phase space. This techni1ue is relatively difficult to perform in comparison to others, and, therefore, it is better to use it only after a high level of e$perience has been reached because it is difficult to remain in the phase during any metamorphic process. 0s is evident in the name of this techni1ue, it can be used to find ob&ects and also create ne( ob&ects from found ob&ects. T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )IT8 T:A+S<OCATIO+ A+& 2I+&I+G OBGECTS 0pplying translocation and ob&ect finding techni1ues (ithout the precondition of a steady phase. Insufficient concentration on a desire to travel to a location or to find an ob&ect. 6oubting that results (ill be achieved instead of having complete confidence. Passive performance of the techni1ues instead of a strong desire and high level of aggression. 9orgetting to repeat translocation or ob&ect finding techni1ues (hen the techni1ue did not (or! or (or!ed incorrectly during the first attempt. 2etting distracted by e$traneous thoughts during the lengthy process of teleporting (ith eyes shut. Total concentration is re1uired at all times. 0pplying the techni1ue of teleportation (ith eyes open (ithout ade1uate e$perience. 9ailing to immediately translocate (hen using the closed eyes techni1ueI this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni1ue.

 2lossing over minute details or only observing the broad features of a remote ob&ect (hile applying translocation by concentration. 0 delayed desire to move (hile translocating during separation. 0n instantaneous desire to immediately move is necessary. 9orgetting to first shut a door completely (hen using translocation through a doorI other(ise, there (ill be contact (ith (hat is already behind it. sing a translocation techni1ue to go through a (all (ithout !no(ing ho( to pass through solid ob&ects. Paying too much attention to the process of translocation through a (allI this leads to being trapped in the (all. 9orgetting to shut the eyes (hile translocating diving headfirst. The eyes should remain closed until after the techni1ue is complete. Insufficient internal association (ith an animate ob&ect (hile finding it by calling its name. Trying to find an ob&ect via interrogation instead of passively communicating (ith living ob&ects of the phase. sing distant corners (hen applying the techni1ue of finding an ob&ect around the corner. *hoose nearby corners to avoid (asting precious travel time. 0pplying transmutation techni1ues (ithout possessing sufficient e$perience in managing F"maintaining%G the phase space.

E-ercises for Cha ter 1

=uestions 1. -hat becomes possible (ith the ability to translocate in the phase. ). -hat becomes possible (ith the ability to find ob&ects in the phase. 7. -hat do translocation and finding ob&ects techni1ues have in common. :. -hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by translocation and finding ob&ects.

;. 5o( may one translocate across very short distances. <. -hen the flight techni1ue by &umping out of a (indo( be attempted. >. -hat should be done if translocation and ob&ect finding techni1ues do not yield the re1uired result. ?. Is it possible to find a person from real life using the techni1ue of finding ob&ects. @. 6oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phase. 1A. -hat are the fundamental components of space and ob&ect stability. 11. 5o( large is the role of auditory perception in the stability of space. 1). -hat is most important (hile using a teleportation techni1ue. 17. -hat does speed of movement depend on during teleportation. 1:. 3hould a novice apply the techni1ue of teleportation (ith open eyes. 1;. -hat techni1ue might the translocation (ith closed eyes techni1ue turn into. 1<. 3hould large or small details be scrutini=ed (hile translocating by concentration on remote ob&ects. 1>. Is the techni1ue of translocation during separation applied after separation or (hile beginning to separate. 1?. -hen applying the techni1ue of translocation through a door+ is it better if the door is open or closed. 1@. -hy might translocation by passing through a (all fail. )A. -hen using translocation by diving, is it important to be in a place (here there is something to stand on. )1. -hile applying the techni1ue of rotation, should rotation be imagined or real. )). Is it possible to use a translocation techni1ue to attempt finding ob&ects. )7. -hen using the techni1ue of calling by name, (hat should be done if the name of a desired person in the phase is un!no(n.

):. -hile loo!ing for an ob&ect using the method of in1uiry, is it important to specify that the ob&ect needs to be found "1uic!ly%. );. 5o( far bac! must a turn occur (hen the techni1ue of finding ob&ects by turning is being used. )<. -ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the techni1ue of finding ob&ects around the corner. )>. Is it necessary to shut the eyes (hile using the transmutation techni1ue. Tasks 1. 6edicate the ne$t three phases to e$periments (ith translocation techni1ues, using all of them and travelling (herever you (ant. ). 0fter e$periencing three phases dedicated to translocation, select the techni1ues that (or! best for you. 7. 6uring the ne$t phase, travel to the ,iffel To(er, to the Moon, and to the homes of some of your relatives. :. 6edicate the ne$t three phases to e$periments (ith the full range of techni1ues for finding ob&ects, including translocation techni1ues. ;. 0fter three phases dedicated to finding ob&ects, select the techni1ues that you are most comfortable (ith. <. In the ne$t phase that you e$perience, find your mother, and then at the same location locate this te$tboo!, a red globe, and a green rose.

Cha ter !4 - A

lication

T8E ESSE+CE O2 APP<ICATIO+S 2O: P8ASE STATES Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and variety of e$perience that the practitioner is often not concerned (ith the 1uestion of ho( the phase might be purposefully used. The critical 1uestion of application becomes even more critical as e$perience increases. 0pplication of the phase becomes more vivid against the bac!ground of understanding ho( the phenomenon can provide a means of gaining information and ne( e$periences. 3ome approach the phase practice (ith a predetermined goal, uninterested in anything else. -ith a specific goal, a problem may arise in the origination of the goal because the phase phenomenon is (rapped in a thic! layer of pre&udices and stereotypes, (hich often have no bearing on the reality. The primary purpose of this chapter is to precisely separate reality from fiction. Its second purpose is to provide a detailed description of (hat may be obtained from the practice of phase e$periences. ,very proven and accessible practical application of the phase is based on three 1ualities+ aG application founded on the phaseDs ability to simulate any ob&ect and any space (ith any properties and functionsI bG application based on the opportunity to connect (ith the subconscious mind in order to obtain informationI cG application based on the phaseDs ability to impact a practitionerDs physiology. Most importantly, nothing described in this chapter is difficult to achieve. 0ny application may be achieved during the very first phase if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the appropriate

techni1ues for translocation or finding ob&ects. Regardless of (hether the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic (orldvie(, a full range of access is inherently possible. Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e$ceed the scope of descriptions related through this chapter. It is possible that other applications simply have not been proven yet, and, so far, the correct methods of practicing these un!no(n. Only the practitioner may determine the limits of possibility (ithin the phase. Of course, common sense should be applied, or it (ould be logically and psychologically difficult to disengage misconceptions. The goal of this chapter is to provide a real Bthough $ini$al) foundation that is fir$ and unyielding, &hatever the circu$stance( -f the practitioner follo&s a strict approach to practice, it &ill "e $uch $ore difficult to "eco$e lost during further practical and theoretical studies( APP<ICATIO+S BASE& O+ SI,5<ATIO+ Many (onder about the nature of the phase state in relation to the brain, i.e. (hether or not the phase is all in oneDs head. 4ut in the conte$t of applying the phase, this is not a valid concern. Perception of the entire physical environment is performed through sensory organs. In the phase, perception is the same, sometimes even more realistic. -hether everything described in this chapter occurs in reality or is merely simulated ma!es no difference in terms of the encountered sensations. Travelling %round the &orld' It is possible to reach any point of the planet, and it is particularly interesting to revisit places (here the practitioner once lived or visited, and visit places that the practitioner has a strong desire to visit. ,very sight and beauty of the ,arth become accessible, be it the ,iffel To(er or an island in Oceania, the Pyramids of ,gypt, or 0ngel 9alls. Through Outer Space+ 0lthough human!ind is not going to reach Mars any time soon, any practitioner may stand on its surface

and e$perience its uni1ue landscape through the use of translocation in the phase. There is nothing more ama=ing than observing gala$ies and nebulae, planets, and stars from the vantage pint of vast space. Of all phase applications available, this one provides practitioners (ith the most stri!ing aesthetic e$periences. To different places in ti$e' This ma!es it possible to visit a childhood, to see (hat a person (ill loo! li!e in the futureI a pregnant (oman in the phase may see (hat her child (ill loo! li!e. Travel far bac! in time and (itness the construction of the Pyramids at 2i=a, see Paris in the 1>th century, (ander among the dinosaurs of the Curassic period. Through different &orlds' Travel a (orld that has been described in literature or &ust invented by the practitioner, developed in the imagination. These could be e$traterrestrial civili=ations, parallel (orlds, or universes from fairy tales and films. 0ny destination is nearby. Encounters 5ith relatives' 3ince relatives cannot al(ays see each other, there is the remar!able possibility to meet each other and tal! in the phase. Of course, this does not entail mutual presence. It is enough for one person to possess the re1uired desire # the second person may never even !no(. Reali=ing the desire to contact a close relative and e$change information is a treasure. 5ith ac4uaintances' *ircumstances often prevent seeing people (ho are important. This is an opportunity to reali=e a desire and finally meet that certain person again. 5ith the dead' Regardless of the nature of the phase phenomenon, nothing else yields the possibility to see, tal! to, and embrace a deceased loved one. These are vivid, personal e$periences, accessible to everyone, and achieving these encounters does not re1uire ma&or difficulty. *ourage is the only necessity. 9rom a techni1ue#related point of vie(, a stable phase and application of the finding ob&ects techni1ue sets the stage for (hat at first may seem impossible. It should be noted that (hen a deceased person is

encountered in the phase, the distortions caused by the ob&ect finding techni1ue may lead to some very undesirable occurrences. If you are interested in this sub&ect, you should carefully study the guideboo! :ontact &ith the 3eceased Fauthor+ Michael RadugaG. 5ith cele"rities' Through the use of ob&ect finding techni1ues, a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous person. This could be a historical persona, a contemporary politician, or an artist. In the phase state, they are all accessible for any type of interaction. 9or e$ample, a practitioner could meet Culius *aesar, Cesus *hrist, 'apoleon, *hurchill, 3talin, 5itler, ,lvis Presley, Marilyn Monroe, and a great many others. :ealiHing &esires ,veryone has dreams. Regardless of (hether they ever come true in reality, they may at least en&oy be reali=ed in the phase. 3ome dream of a visit to /as 8egas, some to drive a 9errari, some visit Outer 3pace, others (ould li!e to bathe in a pile of money, and some desire se$ual e$periences. 0ll of these may finally be e$perienced in the phase. Alternative to the ?irtual )orld In the phase, young men may participate in game battles as if the battles are real. 0 practitioner can visit unusual (orlds and places (hile en&oying completely realistic sensations, feel a (eapon in his hands, and even the smell of gunpo(der. If desired, even the sensation of battle (ounds may be e$perienced. 2aming possibilities in the phase are not limited by the po(er of a microprocessor, but the e$tent of a practitionerDs imagination. Creative &evelo (ent :reating &or+s of art' sing the methods of ob&ect finding or translocation, an artistic practitioner can purposefully see! an ob&ect in the phase that may be composed in real life. If necessary, it is possible to easily return to study an ob&ect in the phase. 9or e$ample, a painter may find a stunning landscape and puts it to canvas in the

real (orld (hile periodically returning to the same landscape in the phase. Fie&ing future co$pleted &or+s of art' If an artist is in the process of reali=ing an idea, then a preliminarily loo! at the end result of a design may be seen in the phase. 0 painter can e$amine a painting in advanceI a sculptor may see a completed sculpture, and an architect (ill be able to (ander through a house that is still in the early stages of design. 0ny creative (or! can be simulated in the phase. % source of inspiration and fantasy' The phase practice imparts ideas and desires that positively affect creative endeavors. 9urthermore, the reali=ation of desires and travels through unusual spaces evo!e great emotions, (hich provide e$cellent inspiration. APP<ICATIO+S BASE& O+ CO+TACT )IT8 T8E S5BCO+SCIO5S ,I+& 0ssume that the phase state is &ust an e$ceptionally unusual state of brain and that perception (ithin it is no more than an unusually realistic play of its functions. 0ssume that a practitioner in the phase decides to travel to a forest. To do so, the translocation (ith closed eyes techni1ue is used, and, as a result, a forest appears. -hat happens if the vision contains very detailed !no(ledge of forests, (hat forests consist of, and (here forests originate. The brain creates a hyper#realistic space superior to that of everyday reality, consisting of millions of blades of grass, leaves, hundreds of trees, and a multitude of sounds. ,ach blade of grass has depth and build, not &ust a point. ,ach leaf also consists of component parts. 0 uni1ue, natural pattern ma!es up the bar! of each tree. 3uddenly, a (ind begins to blo( through the forest, and millions of leaves and blades of grass, follo(ing a mathematical model of the propagation of air masses, begin oscillating in a (aveli!e fashion. Thus, a certain resource inside us is capable in mere seconds not only of creating millions of details in the desired scene, but also to control each of those details individually!

,ven if the phase is &ust a state of mind, this does not mean that there are no sources of information (ithin it. The mind possesses great computing ability and is e1uipped to imagine the full e$tent of the impossible. 'o computer, ho(ever po(erful, is capable of similar feats. 0 practitioner is able to someho( tap into ama=ing resources (hile in the phase. It only remains to learn e$actly ho( to achieve mastery. It is possible that the phase space is governed by the subconscious mind. This means that the practitioner is able to contact the subconscious (hile in the phase state. 6uring everyday life, the subconscious mind sends information based on calculations determined by enormous capabilities. 5o(ever, humans neither hear nor perceive these signals because people are accustomed to receiving information linguistically. The subconscious mind hardly operates (ithin the limitations of language. *ommunication (ith the subconscious mind on a conscious level is only possible (ithin the phase. If all phase ob&ects are created and controlled by the subconscious mind, then it is possible to use them as translators. 9or e$ample, (hen tal!ing to a person in the phase, normal (ords are heard (hile the ob&ect and communicated information is controlled by the subconscious mind. 0n e$planation of ho( information is obtained in the phase can hardly be une1uivocally proven. Perhaps there are other undiscovered resources. 4ut that is not so important. The most important thing is definitely !no(n+ ho( to obtain information in the phase. The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is not comple$. 0fter entering the phase, only the techni1ues for obtaining information and the methods of verifying it need to be learned to increase in !no(ledge gleaned from the phase.

4ased on the pragmatic e$planation of the nature of the phase as an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious, it may be assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is limited. If the phase e$ists (ithin the confines of the brain, then the brain can only operate on data that has been received by the brain over the course of its e$istence. Indeed, it appears that everything perceived through the sensory organs is remembered and correlated (ith other dataI this observation concern conscious and unconscious perception. If any event is actually a conse1uence of other events, (hich (ere, in turn, also conse1uences of previous happenings, then nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is !no(n # then it is possible to calculate (hat is implied by it. 0s a result, if everything is based solely on the resource of the subconscious mind, then information may be obtained about everything that is related to an individual life+ the practitionerDs e$periences and the e$periences of those (ith (hom the practitioner e$periences life. /essons are learned from the future and past, and the future and past of others. 0ll in all, in order to approach !no(ing the (hole of the information available in the phase, personal !no(ledge capacity (ould need to increase by 1AA or even 1,AAA times.

The only information that is not available in the phase is that about (hich the subconscious mind does not have any preliminary information. 9or e$ample, (here to purchase a (inning lottery tic!et that (ill (in millions of dollars cannot be learned since there is no data that could support the necessary calculation. The subconscious mind (ill also not be able to sho( the practitioner (hat a random street in a small to(n on the other end of the ,arth loo!s li!e. 0 practitioner should not try guessing (hat information the subconscious mind has to offer and (hat it doesnDt because mista!es are easily made. 9or e$ample, if a practitioner has never been to Paris and never seen the ,iffel To(er, it might be assumed that the practitionerDs subconscious mind !no(s nothing about it either, although through over the course of life, the mind has already received an enormous 1uantity of information from pictures, photographs, stories, videos, boo!s, and so forth. There are three basic techni1ues for obtaining information in the phase. ,ach of them has its advantages and disadvantages that must be studied and learned before use. Ani(ate Ob3ects Techni$ueD To perform this method of obtaining information, the practitioner, in a full deep phase, must locate a person by techni1ues for finding ob&ects and procure the necessary information from that person through the use of simple 1uestions. If the re1uired information is lin!ed to a certain person, then that person should be located in the phase. If the information is not related to anyone in particular, then it is possible to create a universal information source, (hich must be associated (ith (isdom and !no(ledge. 9or e$ample, this could be a (ise recluse, a (ell#!no(n philosopher, or a guru. The advantage of this techni1ue is that it is easy to pose additional 1uestions and it is also easier to verify (hatever information is obtained. 0 dra(bac! of this techni1ue is that, for many, it is difficult to communicate (ith living ob&ects in the phase because of ob&ectsD unresponsiveness or a practitionerDs problems (ith maintaining the phase (hile tal!ing (ith ob&ects.

Inani(ate Ob3ects Techni$ueD se techni1ues for finding ob&ects in order to locate information from sources li!e inscriptions, boo!s, or ne(spapers. -hile trying to locate the source of information, remember to concentrate of a belief that (hat is found (ill have the desired information. 3ource types are not limited to paper mediaI even radios or televisions may be (atched or listened to, and computer search engines and file systems also may produce results. 0 huge dra(bac! of this techni1ue is that considerable complications arise if an additional or a follo(#up 1uestion emerges, (hich may cause the practitioner to have to stop and repeat the searching process. The upside to this techni1ue is that if a practitioner has problems communicating (ith animate ob&ects, this techni1ue can temporarily serve as a reasonable alternative. E isode Techni$ueD In order to receive information using this method, imagine an event or series of events that (ill communicate the desired information. Then, move to the area (here predetermined events are e$pected to ta!e place by using translocation techni1ues. 0fter arriving at the destination, use visual observation to understand (hat is ta!ing place and the information that the events are communicating. The episode techni1ue is suitable only for cases (here information can be obtained by observation. 0o& to verify the infor$ationG The techni1ues for receiving information in the phase are not comple$ in and prove successful after &ust a fe( attempts. 5o(ever, as (as already mentioned earlier, the properties of phase spaces that do not fall under the category of vivid perception are not particularly stable # not only in terms of appearance, but also in terms of their properties. *orrectness of information also depends on the ob&ects themselves. The problem

rests in that the practitioner may not be able to properly control the ob&ect in 1uestion and may receive false information. Interesting fact! The phase space is not everyday reality@ therefore, it should not "e treated &ith the nor$al "elief that every o"servation should "e regarded as fact( ,ven (hen a practitioner has learned to find animate and inanimate ob&ects (ith an absence of doubt, there is still no guarantee that the received information is al(ays accurate. 0 fe( techni1ue# related tric!s are able to test an ob&ectDs ability to spea! the truth. 9or e$ample, an ob&ect can tal! about something (ith absolute confidence, but that does not mean that (hat it communicates is all true. If doubt is e$perienced (hile finding the ob&ect, then doubt may have an effect on (hat the ob&ect says. This is (hy doubt must be avoided at all costs # although beginners are bound to initially have problems (ith this. To determine (hether an ob&ect is able to give accurate information, a control 4uestion should be as!edI a 1uestion that the subconscious mind cannot !no( the ans(er to. 9or e$ample, a practitioner might as! a found ob&ect+ "-here can I buy the (inning lottery tic!et for the Mega 4all &ac!pot.% If the ob&ect starts ans(ering such 1uestions seriously, going into great detail, then the ob&ect should be created ane( since its properties allo( the possibility that it (ill lie. 0 proper ob&ect (ill remain silent or say that it does not !no( the ans(er to the control 1uestion. 0fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a control 1uestion, it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a clarifying 4uestion. The practitioner needs to as! the ob&ect (here the information came from to find out the details that offer proof of the informationDs authenticity in the real (orld. The ob&ect may also be as!ed the same 1uestions more than once, provided they are re(orded. The ans(ers to re(orded 1uestions must be identical.

Remember, the more important the nature of the information and the more serious action it implies, the more effort needs to be invested in verifying it in the real (orld since a certain percentage of the information is bound to be incorrect despite correct performance of information#related techni1ues. APP<ICATIO+ BASE& O+ I+2<5E+CI+G P89SIO<OG9 There are three main elements that, (ith the help of the phase, may influence the physiology in very beneficial (ays. 9irst, it is possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn ho( to influence physiology. 3econd, the brain reacts more strongly to sensations than to real events. 9or e$ample, if running (hile in the phase, the physical processes of the body (ould be consistent (ith the processes occurring in the body of a person running in reality+ respiration accelerates, blood pressure increases, the heartbeat 1uic!ens, and even blood flo( to the feet becomes greater. Third, (hile the practitioner e$periences profound changes of consciousness in the phase, this is (hen all direct and indirect forms of autosuggestion are most effective. 'ot all influences on physiology are 1AAJ effective. 5o(ever, even (ithout a guaranteed rate of success, the effort to influence physiology is (orthy of attention because ama=ing results can be obtained. 0l(ays remember that achieving a good result may re1uire repeated influence from the phase. ,ven in the physical (orld, medications re1uire repeated ingestion. If the goal is to cure a disease, do not rely solely on the phase. 3ic! persons must use the phase alongside treatment from physicians. The more serious the illness, the more strongly this rule applies. Obtaining Infor(ation The diagnosis of health problems may be performed (ith the same techni1ues used for obtaining information. It is also possible to learn methods to cure health problems, if such methods e$ist. 4oth of

these possibilities apply to third parties being helped by efforts in the phase. Information gathering is the only proven (ay to influence the physiology of other people by using the phase. 9or e$ample, it is possible to find a (ell#!no(n healer in the phase and as! about personal health problems or the problems of a friend or family member. 0 clarified ans(er may be used in the assistance of traditional medical treatment. Attention fro( &octors 9ind a doctor in the phase by using the techni1ue of finding ob&ects and as! the doctor to ta!e e$amine or treat a !no(n illness or other health problem. 9or e$ample, in case of abdominal pains the doctor may palpate the belly, apply pressure to various points, and perform a special massage. 0ny actions are possible, including an operation. 0fter leaving the phase, the practitioner (ill feel a positive result. Taking (edicines The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in reality since all actions occur in a highly modified state of consciousness and are perceived directly. Ob&ect locating techni1ues may be used to find medications used to treat e$isting problems. It is also possible to create self#made substances to produce the desirable effect. 9or e$ample, in case of an acute headache in reality, a practitioner may ta!e a pain!iller (hile in the phase and its effect (ill be partially felt in the (a!eful state. &irect Effect 0n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions in the phase. 9or e$ample, a sore throat may be (armed by envisioning a burning sensation in the throat or by moving to a hot location, li!e a sauna. If a practitioner (ould li!e to increase physical fle$ibility, then stretching in the phase (ill cause the body to ad&ust to the none$istent action by rela$ing and tensing the corresponding tendons and muscles.

Progra((ing This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto#training in the phase, (hich is more potent in the phase than reality. 0 practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or aloud and, if possible, should imagine e$periencing the desired result. 9or e$ample, if the aim is to get rid of depression, a practitioner should attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase, e$periencing it to the fullest e$tent possible. 3imultaneously, silent repetition of a goal (ith complete understanding and e$pectation that everything (ill be alright, that everything is (onderful (ill undoubtedly produce the desired effect. 5seful e- eriences ,verything (ith useful properties in reality should be e$perienced as useful in the phase since the body (ill react in practically the same manner. seful e$periences may include e$ercising, going to the gym, having a massage, ta!ing mud or salt baths, and e$periencing pleasant emotions. Psychology Practicing phase#related techni1ues favorably affects the psychology because it offers ne( opportunities and evo!es ne( emotions. 5o(ever, there are specific applications of the phase that produce differing psychological effects. 9or e$ample, it is possible to use the phase space as a bridge for dealing (ith phobias by facilitating a setting (here a practitioner may confront and deal (ith certain fears. 8arious comple$es may be defeated in a similar manner. The use of a (ell#!no(n techni1ue called re#visiting FrecapitulationG, (here a person re#e$periences adverse events (hile trying to relate to them in a ne( (ay, has been used successfully in the phase. Training

0ny motor s!ills can be sharpened by using it in reality and in the phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is generated at the level of interaction bet(een areas of the brain that correspond to muscle action. In the phase, (restlers may practice thro(s, !arate fighters may practice punches and !ic!s, and gymnasts may practice acrobatics. 5aving enough time to practice these actions in the phase is another matter. 5+P:O?E+ E22ECTS People often approach the practice of various phase states (ith deep#rooted misconceptions about (hat can actually be achieved through practice. ,verything listed in this section refers to these misconceptions. It has not been proven that any of these things is impossibleI ho(ever, actions should be based on proven and verified methods in order to avoid ma!ing mista!es and (asting time. Ehysical e#it' If the first e$perience (ith the phase phenomenon happens by accident, it is almost impossible not to interpret it as a real separation of the soul from the body H a physical e$it. This is ho( the initial phase e$perience really feels. -ith e$perience it becomes easily noticeable that certain things in reality do not match things in the phase, li!e the placement of ob&ects or furniture in the house (here a phase is first encountered. 'o actual physical e$it from the body has ever been proven through scientific e$perimentation and observation. 9or e$ample, in the phase, it is not possible to fly around to locations in physical (orld, although it may seem so, the locations that are e$perienced are produced (ithin the mind. 'or is it possible to pinch someone in the phase and then to find a bruise on the person (hile in reality. Other &orlds' The phase space is similar to the physical (orld, and a practitioner may be inclined to thin! that the soul has left the body. 3ometimes the phase ta!es on an absolutely unnatural form. 0s a result, the practitioner may decide that a parallel (orld has been entered+ the (orld beyond, the astral plane, mental space, or the ether. 0lthough travel in the phase can lead to many places, this does

not mean that the phase allo(s travel through or use of actual, alternate (orlds. The practitioner should be reasonable. 3evelop$ent of super-a"ilities' It is partially correct to consider the practice of the phase as an e$trasensory ability since it is an actual development of e$tremely unusual s!ills that have al(ays been considered mystical. Times have changed, and the phase should hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric, obscure corners of !no(ledge. There e$ists an unproven theory that the practice of the phase can impart unusual abilities. -hile literature is full of references to this effect, these abilities have not yet been proven by anyone. The same applies to intentionally developing unusual abilities in the phase. Oes, these may be trained (hile in the phase, but this does not mean that training in the phase (ill yield the same results in the real (orld. Practice should not be for the sa!e of achieving super#abilities since there are many proven applications that do translate to reality in valuable (ays. 4e realistic. 5SE O2 T8E P8ASE B9 T8E &ISAB<E& -hile practicing the phase may still be vie(ed by the ma&ority as entertainment or an element of self#development at best, phase practice ta!es on a (hole ne( meaning for the physically disabled. 9or them, the phase may be the only place (here the handicaps of reality dissolve and disabled practitioners e$perience a range of possibility greater than the life e$perienced in reality. 0 blind person (ill see again in the phase, even more clearly than seeing people do in reality. 3omeone (ho is paraly=ed (ill be able (al!, run, and also fly. 0 deaf person (ill hear the murmur of streams and the chirping of birds. 9or the disabled, the phase practice is a chance to discover ne(, incomparable (orlds free of physical limitation. 'aturally, there are some nuances that must be understood. 9irst, for e$ample, if a person (as born blind, then there is the 1uestion as to (hether or not they (ould be able to see in the phase the same (ay ordinary people see. 5o(ever, this issue has not been fully studied,

and blind people should simply carry out their o(n independent research. 3econd, some types of disabilities can negatively affect the practice of the phase states. 9or e$ample, people (ho have gone blind have greater difficultly catching the intermediate state bet(een sleep and (a!efulness since, unli!e seeing people, they may a(a!en (ithout opening their eyes to the perception of sound. Third, a purely psychological disability plays an enormous negative role. Psychologically disabled people have a (hole range of specific beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them. -hatever the individual issues, this particular area of phase applications re1uires additional study. It deserves significant attention because it is a valid tool for the rehabilitation of the disabled. It is (or!able, uni1ue, and e$tremely surprising in terms of the e$periences that it offers. T9PICA< ,ISTA>ES )8E+ 5SI+G APP<ICATIO+S 0ttempting an applied use of the phase (ithout reaching a good depth. 6eepening must al(ays be performed before applications are attempted. 4eing so involved in phase applications that "maintaining% techni1ues are forgotten. 9orgetting to consider ho( to breathe (hen traveling through Outer 3pace or under(ater, (hich may lead to asphy$iation. *oncentrating on a certain ob&ect (hile traveling through time instead of concentrating on time travel, (hich should be the focus since it is the point of performing the applications. 9orgetting techni1ues for "maintaining% (hen animate ob&ects are encountered (hen these techni1ues must al(ays be !ept in mind. 0n inability to overcome fear during contact (ith deceased people. This fear must be overcome once and it (ill never resurface again. /imiting desires (hile practicing the phase. There is no limit to desire (ithin the phase.

 /imiting the performance of certain actions, although there are no customary norms of behavior in the phase, unless the practitioner decides upon specific limits. -hile loo!ing for information in the phase, attempting to obtain !no(ledge (hich clearly e$ceeds the scope of the subconscious mind. 0pplying the techni1ue of obtaining information from animate ob&ects (ithout !no(ing ho( to communicate (ith them. 9orgetting to chec! the ability of an ob&ect to convey valid !no(ledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if it is not verified. 9ailing to verify information in the phase before using it in reality. 9orgetting to verify serious information obtained in the phase in reality before using it. 8erification absolutely must be performed to avoid using bad information in reality. 0 single attempt to influence the physiology through the phase. In the ma&ority of cases, results are gained through repeated effort. 0n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase, (hereas it is compulsory to see! medical advice. Initially believing that the phase is the e$it of the soul from the body, (hile this is easily refuted in practice. *oncentrating only on unproven applications, despite all the evidence out there that this is most li!ely a (aste of time.

E-ercises for Cha ter !4

=uestions 1. -hat are the three basic applications of the phase. ). 0re proven practical phase applications accessible to any practitioner. 7. -hile in the phase, is it possible to actually travel through 0frica. :. Is it possible to (al! on the moon in the phase.

;. Is it possible, (hile in the phase, to appear at the time of the ,arthDs creation. <. In the phase, is it possible to appear in the magical (orld behind the loo!ing glass. >. -hich relatives can be met in the phase. ?. Is it possible to meet and tal! to your favorite actor in the phase. @. -here can one reali=e any cherished dream. 1A. *an a practitioner appear in the computer game 3oo$. 11. *an a musician use the phase for creative purposes. 1). 6oes the practicing the phase influence a personDs imagination. 17. -hat most probably governs the phase space. 1:. -hat !ind of information is obtainable in the phase. 1;. -hile in the phase, is it possible to find out (here the lost !ey to an apartment is located. 1<. -hat !ind of people can discover (here treasure is hidden in the phase. 1>. 3hould any information obtained in the phase be construed as accurate. 1?. 3hould information obtained in the phase be verified after (a!ing up, even if itDs already verified in the phase. 1@. 3hould obtaining information occur before deepening has been performed. )A. To obtain information (hile using the animate ob&ects techni1ue, (ho should be tal!ed to if the goal is it to find out the thoughts of a boss at (or!. )1. 5o( might information from an animate ob&ect be obtained. )). *an an inscription on a (all be used as an inanimate source of information. )7. Is it possible to use the episode techni1ue to learn (here one has lost the !ey to oneDs apartment. ):. 3hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a disease through phase practice.

);. 0re results from influencing physiology in the phase al(ays 1AAJ guaranteed. )<. -hat phase techni1ues might be used to influence the bodies of other people. )>. Is it possible to obtain information that can be used to influence the body and its functions. )?. Is it possible to ta!e a (ell#!no(n pain!iller in the phase and feel its effects on e$it. )@. Is it possible to use autosuggestion in the phase. 7A. *an athletes use the phase to develop their s!ills. 71. Is it realistic to e$pect to the soul (ill e$it the body (hile practicing the phase. 7). Is it possible to enter a parallel universe through the phase. 77. 3hould a practitioner hope to develop super#abilities in the phase. Tasks 1. 8isit the Pyramids of 2i=a in the phase. Meet your favorite singer and travel to your dream house. ). -hile in the phase, find a (ise person (ho is an authority on matters of the phase and learn from them (hat entrance techni1ues (ill best suit your practice. 7. Try to perceive heat throughout the entire body by translocation to a sauna or through auto#suggestion. :. /earn to move ob&ects by simply staring at them in the phase, and appreciate the e$tent to (hich this s!ill is reflected in reality.

Part III Au-iliary Infor(ation

Cha ter !! " 5seful Ti s

A P:AG,ATIC APP:OAC8 The only sure (ay to get practice (ithout unnecessarily (asting time is to have a pragmatic and rational approach to the nature and possibilities of the phase phenomenon. The ma&ority of available information regarding dissociative phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes obvious during initial entries into the phase. This is (hy practice should begin from the perspective of a clean slate, using a logical bearing in thin!ing+ everything not confir$ed "y personal e#perience should "e ta+en &ith a grain of salt( This means only personal e$perience should be ta!en seriously, not the e$perience of ac1uaintances, authors, teachers, blogs, or forums. To err is humanI thus, it is also human to pass on errors. 0s a result, many parado$ical old (ivesD tales concerning the phase phenomenon have become accepted a priori. 'ot everything (ritten in esoteric literature should be thro(n out. 3ome things may possibly be dra(n from it. 0fter reading such literature, a practitioner should not assume that the ne( !no(ledge is a universal truth. 9or a house to stand firm, it needs a solid foundation. The only (ay to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach the phenomenon in a do(n#to#earth manner, from a scientific perspective, discounting any purported supernatural phenomena.

Once a solid foundation has been established, everyone has the right to build their o(n truth on it. I+&EPE+&E+T A+A<9SIS If a practitioner is only interested in having phase e$periences, then the simple treatment of this guideboo! and other materials may suffice. 5o(ever, if a practitioner (ants to achieve the best results, ample focus must be given to individual thought and formation of opinion based on personal analysis. ntil all 1uestions are ans(ered through a search for ans(ers in various sources of information, no real progress should be e$pected. Many things cannot be described or e$plained. The resolution of many issues (ill al(ays remain up to individual &udgment and understanding. 9inding all of the ans(ers is impossible. Moreover, trying to possess all of the ans(ers is a serious inhibitor to real progress because the practitioner (ould have to digress into dubious literature and conversation aside from real, formative practice. The advice and e$periences of others may lead to error. In no case should there be any authorities or unachievable ideals. 0 logical, even s!eptical approach should be ta!en during research and practice. The goal of this guideboo! is to provide the reader (ith linear, factual information sufficient for the development of independent analysis. ,ach time a practitioner encounters some incomprehensible phenomenon or problem (hen performing phase techni1ues, an independent analysis of the phenomenon should be formed before loo!ing else(here for the cause. If a see!er loo!s for ans(ers outside of personal reasoning, there is a high ris! of assimilating and acting upon a fallacy. Many practitioners are not (illing to analy=e personal successes and failures, and instead search all sorts of boo!s, (hich often contradict one another, and using a hodge#podge of e$traneous, unverified information can only lead one to further, and 1uite infectious, fallacy.

APP:OAC8 TO <ITE:AT5:E /iterature of every sort has al(ays been the main vehicle for disseminating information about the phase state. The phase phenomenon is referred to by other terms+ astral pro&ection, out#of# body travel, or lucid dreaming. In addition to disseminating information, many boo!s are often vehicles for disseminating fallacies. This is easy to recogni=e (hen researching several such boo!s and comparing described events and theories. The information is more often than not contradictory and based on opinions that have never been verified by anyone, including the authors. The result is a mass of speculation that has no bearing on reality, nearly al(ays accompanied by a false certainty about the sub&ect matter. 5o(ever, unli!e the real (orld, the phase is not a place (here one can believe oneDs eyes or feelings. The phasesD appearance and 1ualities depend very much on the person e$periencing it. 9or e$ample, if a practitioner believes upon entering the phase the body (ill be lying nearby on the bed, then it (ill al(ays be there. If a practitioner believes that the perceived body should al(ays be tethered to the physical body, then in the practitioner (ill al(ays see and even feel a tether in the phase. This is a simple case of e$pectations becoming reality. 3imilarly, someone (ho has entered the phase by accident and thin!s that the time of death has arrived may see angels and a tunnel (ith a light at the end. If someone is e$tremely religious, there may be a perception that something holy, even 2od, has appeared. If entry to the phase is construed as a result of being abducted by aliens, then that is e$actly (hat (ill happen. This (ould all be 1uite funny if it (ere not actually encountered. -hen it occurs, the only thing left to do is to believe. To believe, to tell others about it, and (rite boo!s about it... There are authors (ho impart no illusions, but it is often difficult for a novice to separate the truth from illusion or open fabrication, (hich is (hy a s!eptical approach to the contents of any boo! is

(arranted. The only truth conveyed in any boo! is that (hich has been verified by personal e$perience. The rest should simply be noted and possibly ta!en into consideration. In conclusion, boo!s should be studied to discover techni1ue# related information that allo(s a practitioner to enter the phase and control the e$perience. This is the only point of intersection among all beliefs and theories. P:ACTICE E+?I:O+,E+T 3ince techni1ues used to enter the phase are associated (ith a specific type of mental operation, it is necessary to create comfortable conditions so that e$ternal distracters are !ept to a minimum. 0 room should neither be too cold or too hot, nor too bright. Performing techni1ues at a comfortable temperature in a dar!ened room or (hile (earing a sleeping mas! are (ays to promote unhindered practice. Interfering noises are often also ma&or distracters and isolation from such noises is necessary to successful practice. It is often sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and (indo(s. If this does not help, or if it is e$tremely loud outside the (indo(, one can use standard earmuffs. It is also helpful to give advance notice to people so that they are not alarmed. It is also preferable that no one is in the bed (ith the practitioner. Most often, domestic animals interfere (ith the performance of techni1ues, (hich is (hy they should be fed beforehand and !ept out of the room (here direct or indirect techni1ues are practiced. TA<>I+G )IT8 <I>E-,I+&E& PEOP<E 2reat benefit is derived by discussing personal e$periences (ith other practitioners. This leads to an e$change of information, ne( !no(ledge, and mutual help concerning certain problems and issues.

The greatest effect comes through communication in person, and not solely through mail, forums, and blogs. Meeting face#to#face (ith li!e#minded people promotes camaraderie and a useful !no(ledgebase to consider during individual practice. 6ue to the fact that !no(ledge of the phenomenon is underdeveloped, difficulties may arise in finding someone to tal! to. This can be solved by personally sharing phase e$periences (ith friends and family members, regardless of (hether they are fello( practitioners. It is even better to pass on training literature, li!e this guideboo!. The (ebsite www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum devoted to the phase, ma!ing it possible to obtain and e$change a large amount of information. The site also has the contact information for the coordinators of Phase Practitioner *lubs all around the (orld, (hich is a non#commercial association of enthusiasts (ho meet to e$change and discuss e$periences. T8E :IG8T )A9 TO >EEP A GO5:+A< Beeping a &ournal can be of much help (hile learning and practicing the phase. -hen properly !ept, a &ournal can help a practitioner to develop an analysis that (ill increase the 1uality of phase e$periences. 4y and large, !eeping a &ournal helps to iron out a sporadic practice, turning it into a structured discipline that can be mastered. 0n effective diary should contain a massive amount of indicators that allo( a statistical study to uncover patterns. It is essential that each entry include the date, time of day or night, a detailed account of entries into the phase and phase e$periences. 6escriptions of mista!es and a plan of action for the ne$t phase should also be recorded. 6uring the novice stages of practice, even noting unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. /ater on, only successful phase e$periences may be recorded. 5ere is an e$ample of a proper &ournal entry+

&ataC 2#perience /o( 12 January 6th, 2 H 2'88 EM E- erienceC - &o+e up early in the $orning( %fter e#ercising, - too+ a sho&er and ate "rea+fast( - &atched TF and read "oo+s until lunch( - laid do&n for a nap at 1 EM, right after lunch( - felt li+e perfor$ing indirect techni4ues, and affir$ed this intention( &o+e up the first ti$e to $ove$ent, "ut after trying to e$ploy forced falling asleep Bin order to negate the effects of the $ove$ent), - fell asleep( - &o+e up the second ti$e &ithout $ove$ent and tried to roll out( This didn.t &or+ and - tried levitating and getting up( %fter that, - $oved on to phanto$ &iggling( Move$ent occurred in $y right hand( %fter doing this for several seconds, - decided to try listening in( Sounds started, "ut - &as una"le to $a+e the$ louder( 0o&ever, i$ages appeared "efore $y eyes and - started to vie& the$( %fter they "eca$e realistic, - decided to try rolling out and it &or+ed &ithout a hitch( My vision &as di$, as if through a veil( But then, the rest of the sensations - felt reached the verge of reality( This is &hen - &ent to the &indo&( For so$e reason, it &as su$$er outside, and not &inter( There &as a red fire-truc+ outside the &indo&( There &ere really lo& clouds in the s+y( The sun &as a"ove the$( /e#t, everything 4uic+ly faded a&ay and - found $yself "ac+ in $y "ody( Then, - got up and loo+ed at the ti$e( -t &as 2'16 EM( ,istakesC 1( 5hen the phanto$ &iggling &or+ed, - should have aggressively tried to increase the range of $ove$ent, and not

si$ply done &iggling, let alone change to another techni4ue( %fter all, if &iggling occurs, the phase can al&ays "e entered( 2( The sa$e &ith the sounds( - had no great desire to a$plify sounds or even listen in( 2verything &as done lac+adaisically( 8( - should have started &ith deepening and not actions, as visual sensations &ere not vivid( I( - should have e$ployed techni4ues for $aintaining( 6( Jou can.t loo+ do&n for long &ithout si$ultaneously using techni4ues for $aintaining, yet too+ in everything outside the &indo& and in the s+y( K( forgot a"out the plan of action( L( - should have tried again to enter the phase( Plan of action for ne-t ti(eC 1( 3efinitely deepen the phase as $uch as possi"le( 2( should try to go through a &all( 8( Translocate to $y %untie in /e& Jor+( I( Translocate to the Statue of Mi"erty and e#a$ine her cro&n( 6( Try to conduct the e#peri$ent of putting $y hand into $y head(

Cha ter !# " Practitioners6 E- eriences

T8E SIG+I2ICA+CE O2 OT8E: PEOP<E6S EEPE:IE+CES The ability to analy=e the e$periences of others can be a great supplement to personal training. This allo(s a practitioner to revie( and thin! through situations that have not yet been personally encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the e$periences of other practitioners, fe(er mista!es (ill be made during individual practice. Reading the e$periences contained in this section (ill shed much light on proper phase practice. The actions that these practitioners too! to achieve results (ill be subconsciously retained by the readerDs memory. /ater, these actions may reproduce similar circumstances in the phase, affording valuable opportunities to respond using proper actions. 0t the beginning stages of practice, many practitioners lac! in real descriptions of phase e$periences (hile techni1ue#related !no(ledge abounds. Techni1ues can be conceptuali=ed in many different (ays, (hile descriptions of their application are much more demonstrative. Thus, many practitioners have no idea about ho( genuine practice transpires. The e$periences described in this section are useful # even from a psychological point of vie(. ,ven if a person believes that the phase phenomenon e$ists, it may be construed as e$tremely difficult or personally impossible. 0fter learning about other peopleDs e$periences, a person (ill reali=e that these practitioners have been

able to enter the phase (ithout any complicated or incomprehensible techni1ues. The reader (ill understand that the !ey is to ta!e right actions at the right moment, trying to master the phase (ith calmness and confidence. -hile revie(ing and analy=ing other peopleDs e$periences in this section, the reader should remember that these e$periences are based on personal beliefs about the phenomenon, (hich is (hy occult terminology and notions may be encountered. 5o(ever, such aspects of the descriptions are not important. 9ocus should be given to techni1ue#related actions described in the accounts. The reader should also ta!e into account that some nuances Fli!e e$periential realismG are not al(ays clear in the te$t and that it is not al(ays possible to determine (hy certain events occurred in the phase e$periences described here. 0ll of the follo(ing descriptions belong to real people (ho either related the accounts orally, (rote them do(n during classes at the 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel, submitted them via email, or posted them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the total number of recorded, verifiable phase descriptions e$ceeds one thousand, only several cases that are illustrative and useful for developing analysis have been selected. Primarily, these are descriptions of the practitionersD initial phase e$periences, (hich are most relevant to ne( practitioners. The large number of mista!es made by almost every practitioner, regardless of their level of e$perience, should not be ta!en too seriously (hile reading the comments. 0ctually, it is a rare occasion that the phase is e$perienced (ithout any techni1ue#related errors. ,verybody ma!es mista!es. ,$periments are listed in ascending order of 1uality and number of properly performed actions. 0ccounts have been published (ith the permission of the authors.

A+A<9SIS O2 SE<ECTE& P:ACTITIO+E:SI EEPE:IE+CES +oD ! Boris Pronyakin Co y7riterD >ievJ 5kraine - &o+e up in the >correct? state( - i$$ediately felt vi"rations, and "efore - had ti$e to ti$e to thin+ a"out anything, - &as +noc+ed out of $y "ody "y a strong +ic+( - started falling( - had no vision, the floor &as gone( Mi+e a nose-diving airplane, - &as in a free-fall( +ept dropping faster and faster( - started to feel that - &as losing control( The only thing - could do &as increase the speed &ith &hich - fell, all of the &ays that occurred to $e to try $aintain the phase that - atte$pted at that $o$ent only lo&ered $y degree of a&areness( Touching did not do anything for $e, as - &as 1ust an une$"odied spirit in a co$plete vacuu$( Fision &as also $issing( started to panic due to the i$$inent foul( But the acceleration of the fall did not help either, and - &as flying and &aiting for the $o$ent &hen - &ould "e thro&n out into the drea$ &orld( %nd - dropped li+e this until - fell asleep( =uestionsC 6id 4oris describe a direct or indirect techni1ue. -hat could he have done if no spontaneous separation had occurred. 5o( could 4oris have more correctly used deepening techni1ues. -hy (asnEt 4oris thro(n into a phase episode. -hy did he fall asleep. Ans7ers and Co((entsC 0n indirect techni1ue (as employed. If spontaneous separation had not occurred, 4oris could have tried to separate on his o(n. If an attempt to separate had failed, it (ould be necessary to implement indirect techni1ues by intensifying the vibrations, and then try once again to separate. In order to deepen and, mean(hile, reach a destination (hile falling, 4oris should have applied translocation techni1ues and, upon reaching a location, continued to deepen by means of sensory amplification. 9or e$ample, he could have applied the techni1ue of translocation by teleportation

(ith his eyes closed or simply tried to catch sight of his hands through the dar!ness, (hich also (ould have induced an e$it. 4oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears. It could have been used for the techni1ue of listening in, (hich (ould have helped him to deepen and maintain. The lac! of a set aim to land some(here resulted in his endless fall, though it does not al(ays happen this (ay. 4oris fell asleep due to his passivity and also because he forgot that falling asleep (as a possibility, though he did remember about the possibility of an inadvertent return to reality Fa foulG. +oD # Ale-ei Bakharev EngineerD SochiJ :ussia This &as the first ti$e that - $anaged to "eco$e conscious &hile drea$ing( Before falling asleep, - concentrated on the dar+ness "efore $y eyes and tried to re$ain consciousness as long as - could( %ll of a sudden, - drea$t that - &as levitating to the ceiling, &hich resulted in $y "eco$ing conscious that - &as drea$ing( My phanto$ "ody responded poorly to atte$pts to control it, and si$ply hovered "eneath the ceiling( There &ere t&o people sitting on the floor "elo&( They &ere loo+ing in $y direction, "ut it see$ed that they did not see $e( %t this point - &o+e up and felt so$e sort of tingling and itching in $y legs( =uestionsC -hat factors led to the entry into the phase through dream consciousness. -hat needed to be done (hile hovering about beneath the ceiling. -hy did the foul happen so fast. -hat should have been done immediately after returning to the body. Ans7ers and Co((entsC 6ream consciousness occurred due to the 0le$eiDs intent to concentrate on the space before his eyes and his desire to remain conscious for as long as possible. The process of becoming conscious (as caused by the sensation of flying (hile dreaming. 9lying almost al(ays becomes an anchor for dream consciousness. Immediately after the phase occurred, 0le$ei should have started deepening. Instead, he simply hovered about and

observed. -hile all the movements may have been difficult to perform, they should have nevertheless still been done very actively. 0s a result, lightness and a deepening of the phase (ould have ensued. 5is inadvertent e$it from the phase happened due to passivity, failure to deepen, and non#compliance (ith the rules for maintaining the phase. ,ven upon returning to his body, 0le$ei should have tried to separate again. +oD % &(itry ,arkov :adio ,echanicD ,osco7J :ussia My first ti$e &as the $ost terri"le event in $y life( - had never e#perienced such terror( -t happened in 3ece$"er, 1!! ( - &as falling asleep in $y "ed at ho$e( Suddenly, - heard so$eone enter $y roo$, "ut - did not pay attention to the >intruder?( Then, t&o fe$ale hands gra""ed $e fro$ "ehind, and &hile pressing $y "elly, started to lift $y "ody up( - distinctly felt thin fingers &ith long nails on $y "elly, "ut &as co$pletely paraly*ed and a"solutely una"le $ove any part of $y "ody or put up any +ind of resistance( - felt $y "ody go through the ceiling, "ut then &as pulled still higher and higher( - got scared that this could "e death( - &as afraid not so $uch of death as of the un+no&n( %ll of this happened so s&iftly that - found $yself unprepared for such a crossover( - started to pray( - as+ed ;od to help $e free $yself and go "ac+( - panic+ed( - can.t say ho& $any seconds $y forced levitation lasted or ho& high - &as lifted a"ove $y house, "ut the $o$ent ca$e &hen - instantly returned to $y "ed( =uestionsC -as this entry into the phase deliberate. -hat !ind of techni1ue led to the phase. -hat is the name for the complete immobili=ation that 6mitry encountered. -hat should he have done in order to start moving. -hy did his body easily go through the ceiling. -hy (as he able to stop this terrible e$perience by praying. -hat could he have done immediately upon returning to his body.

Ans7ers and Co((entsC This phase e$perience (as spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni1ues since there (as no significant lapse into sleep. The (hole e$perience (as accompanied by sleep paralysis, (hich is (hy it (as difficult for 6mitry to do anything. In order to move in this type of situation, it (ould have been necessary to intensify the phase state by using an indirect techni1ue or redouble efforts to move.p 6mitryDs body (ent through the ceiling (ithout any difficulty because there (as no vision and the phase itself had not been deepened, other(ise this (ould not have happened so easily. Praying and appealing to 2od helped in this case because praying facilitated a rela$ation of perceptions and an intention to go bac! to reality+ t(o factors (hich are crucial during emergency return techni1ues. pon returning to his body, he could have still tried to separate again, though this (ould have been easier said than done due to the fear associated (ith the first e$perience. +oD ' Ivan 9akovlev StudentD Ant7er J Belgiu( - don.t +no& &hat &o+e $e up, "ut - +ne& right a&ay that so$ething &as out of order( - could not open $y eyes, and $y "ody &as al$ost 1ust as+ing to rise up( - understood &hat &as going on N all of this indicated that - &as having an out-of-"ody e#perience( The first thing - tried &as to lift $y left hand up, and it &or+ed( understood that this &as an astral hand, "ecause - could see through it( - $oved hastily and carefully to the other side of the "ed BThere &as a strange sensation in $y head at that ti$e)( - cal$ed do&n and tried to do so$ething again( - levitated a"out half a $eter a"ove the "ed( Fision ca$e "ac+ to $e right then and - sa& &hat appeared to "e $y roo$, "ut not e#actly it, as the rug on the floor &as of a different color pattern and the door &as closed for so$e reason( could not co$prehend &hy everything &as lit fro$ "ehind $y "ac+( Then, - loo+ed over $y left shoulder and sa& a s$all "right &hite "all "ehind $y shoulder "lade at a distance of H inches( -t &as

lighting up the roo$ up( Then - tried to go through the door, "ut &as una"le to( Out of the fear that - &ould never return to $y real "ody, &o+e up in the everyday &orld( =uestionsC 6uring the beginning of his e$perience, (hat phenomenon typical to the phase and a(a!ening did Ivan encounter. -hat !ind of techni1ue, direct or indirect, led to the phase. -hat specific techni1ues (ere employed. 5o( could the sensation of "the body &ust as!ing to rise up% have been used. -hat should have been done immediately (hen he reali=ed that it (as possible to raise his hand. -hat should have been the first actions ta!en after levitation. -hy (as it unnecessary to immediately try to go through the door. -hat should have been done (hen Ivan returned to his body. 6oes this practitioner have a do(n#to#earth vie( or an esoteric vie( of the nature of this phenomenon. Ans7ers and Co((entsC pon a(a!ening in a state of sleep paralysis, Ivan understood that he could use this opportunity for the phase and immediately started attempts to separate (ithout employing techni1ues for creating the state, as they (ould have been superfluous. This (as an indirect techni1ue by nature. 5e could have follo(ed his impulse to levitate from the very beginning instead of moving his hands. 0fter his hand started to move, he could have stood up or separated. Instead, Ivan simply rolled over and calmed do(n for an instant, although doing so is strongly discouraged and is a (aste of the progress made up to this point. Then, after starting to levitate, he should have, first of all, assumed a position distinct from that of his real body, stood up on the floor, and immediately started deepening. Instead, he diverted his attention to the light source and an attempt to go through the door. ,ven if everything had been done correctly from the beginning, there (ould have been no reason to attempt to go through the door. Ivan could have simply opened it. The s!ill of going through ob&ects should be learned after first fine#tuning the ability to deepen and maintain the phase. There (as no reason to return out of fear, but even a return to the body, another immediate attempt at separating (ould most li!ely have been successful.

The use of the term of "astral hand% indicates that the practitioner harbors esoteric vie(s on the sub&ect.

+oD * +atalya >oHhenova EngineerD ShchelkovoJ :ussia 5hen - &as a"out 1L or 1H years old, - read so$e esoteric articles on astral pro1ection( They see$ed 4uite interesting to $e, "ut no $ore than a curiosity N - did not particularly "elieve in such things( One evening, - &ent to "ed as usual( - &o+e up in the $iddle of the night, "ut &as una"le to $ove $y "ody and there &as a loud noise in $y head( 0aving "een re$inded of those articles, - si$ply tried to levitate and - $anaged to do so, as if through $y forehead so$eho&( The sensation of flying &as very realistic, to $y great surprise( The first thought that occurred to $e &as, O5o&, these astral guys &eren.t lying,? - hovered a"ove $y "ody for so$e ti$e in the dar+( - thought of vision, and it started to appear( - then fle& to&ards the &indo&, and upon turning around in to face $y "ody, sa& it in its proper place( - decided to fly "ac+ to it and touch it( 5hen - finally po+ed it, it suc+ed $y "ac+ into it, causing a 4uite strange sensation( =uestionsC -hat type of techni1ue did 'atalya use. -hat (ould she have needed to do if her attempt at levitating had been unsuccessful. -hy (as the phase short#lived. -hat should she have done upon returning to her body. -hy did she use the term "astral%. -ere the articles about astral pro&ection of any significant help. Ans7ers and Co((entsC pon a(a!ening in a state of a sleep paralysis, 'atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing indirect techni1ues. 3he managed to separate immediately, but if sheDd encountered problems in doing so, she could have started the techni1ue of listening in to the "noise% in her head. The phase (as short#lived due to a lac! of activity and failure to perform deepening and "maintaining% techni1ues. 0fter returning to her body, she should have tried to immediately separate. 'atalya holds esoteric vie(s on the nature of the phase phenomenon, (hich is (hy she uses such terminology for it.

5o(ever, the articles helped her to perform the right actions at the right moment. +o . Ale-ander 2ur(enkov StudentD Saint PetersburgJ :ussia - &o+e up at early in the night after so$e difficulties &ith falling asleep( Blurred i$ages started to float "efore $y eyes and - reali*ed that - could enter the phase( - started to discard unnecessary i$ages, and after getting ahold of one of the$, - e$erged in so$e +ind of a yello& corridor( The level of general realness and a&areness of the e#perience &as a"out H 7 to ! 7 of that of reality( - re$e$"ered a"out the $ethods for deepening, &hich is &hy - started to loo+ at everything going on around $e, "ut this did not yield any serious results( - started to touch $yself, "ut all sensation see$ed so$e&hat da$pened( - reali*ed that - &as losing a&areness( - ca$e round, "ut nevertheless fell asleep in a"out 2 seconds( =uestionsC Is it possible to call the techni1ue used in this description a direct techni1ue. -hat specific techni1ue for creating the phase (as employed. -hich separation techni1ue did 0le$ander use. -hat could have been the reason for the "dampened sensation% and inability to deepen. -hat caused him to fall asleep. Ans7ers and Co((entsC The techni1ue employed cannot be considered a direct one, though it (as used at the beginning of the night. 0s a matter of fact, it appears that the preliminary lapse of consciousness into sleep (as significant. If such preliminary sleep had lasted only several minutes, the techni1ue could have been considered partially direct. The techni1ue for observing images (as employed correctly because the images appeared on their o(n. 0le$ander did not employ any techni1ues for separation, as the observing images techni1ue often brings the observer into the observed image or some other (orld, (hich is e$actly (hat happened here. Most li!ely, the (ea!ness of the phase (as due to meager levels of activity and motivation, (hich (ere caused by the fact that it (as early in the night. The practitioner fell asleep because he failed

to deepen sufficiently and not !eep from falling asleep. 2eneral activity (as also very lo(. The bodyDs desire to fall asleep played a ma&or role in the process. 0le$ander had, after all, been having problems sleeping. +oD / :o(an :eutov Syste( Ad(inistratorD Sa(araJ :ussia Truly, the $ost interesting things al$ost al&ays happen une#pectedly( %fter a sufficiently long "rea+ in $y atte$pts to go to the other &orld, tonight - decided to try it again( - thre& in the to&el after yet another unsuccessful atte$pt, rolled to $y other side, and decided to si$ply get a good night.s sleep( - do not +no& e#actly ho& $uch ti$e passed &hile - lay do&n and thought a"out &hat - &as still doing &rong &hile o"serving interesting i$ages that $y i$agination &as dra&ing( But at one fine $o$ent, - suddenly felt the pheno$enon that is co$$only referred to as vi"rations( - started to intensify the$ B- should add that the feeling is indescri"a"le), "ut - could not levitate, though - really &anted to ta+e a loo+ at $yself fro$ the outside( - decided to si$ply stand up, and that.s &hen it all "eca$e $ost interesting, The entire process of transitioning fro$ a hori*ontal position to a vertical one &as acco$panied "y increasingly palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring sound in $y head( The sensation &as the sa$e as that e#perienced after going to "ed after not having slept for 2I hours and then "eing suddenly roused "y so$e"ody' $y head spun, everything started crac+ling inside of it, and - &as a"out to lose consciousness( Then, a flic+ering picture started to appear( -t sta"ili*ed after one or t&o seconds, the roaring in $y head died do&n, and - reali*ed that - &as sitting on $y "ed( - &as in $y apart$ent, thought it &as noticea"ly altered( My roo$ see$ed $ore or less the sa$e, though the interior &as indeed different upon detailed e#a$ination( For e#a$ple, $y $o"ile phone, &hich is al&ays &ithin a reach, &as so$eho& an older and different

$odel( -t turned out to "e the first o"1ect that - tested, as - suddenly &anted very $uch to find out &hat ti$e it &as and chec+ &hich day of the $onth it &as( - distinctly felt the phone in $y hand, "ut upon atte$pting to concentrate on and loo+ at the display, - &as thro&n "ac+ into the reality( - i$$ediately cli$"ed "ac+ out of $y "ody and decided to si$ply pace around the apart$ent &hile trying to re$e$"er &hat - could e#peri$ent on( - tried to con1ure an o"1ect, "ut that didn.t &or+ and resulted in so$e $ental activity( This caused the phase to fade and $y "eing thro&n "ac+ into reality( -n total, there &ere a"out five successive entries into the phase that lasted for 2 to 8 $inutes each( The e#periences &ere not sta"le at all, &hich is &hy - &as e#a$ining $y surroundings in a hurry, al&ays trying to get ahold of anything - could get $y hand on( 0o&ever, there &ere a good a$ount of i$pressions, considering that it &as $y first entry( =uestionsC -hat type of techni1ue did Roman use to enter the phase. -hat (ere the !ey precursors of the phase. -hich separation techni1ue (as used. If Roman had failed to completely separate, (hat techni1ue, besides vibrations, should he have considered. -hat is the most li!ely reason for all of the fouls. -hich single action allo(ed the practitioner to ma!e the phase five times longer. Ans7ers and Co((entsC The phase (as entered through a direct techni1ue, (ith the comfortable position that Roman (as lying in being the main catalyst. 0s long as Roman (as lying in an uncomfortable position, his mind (as unable to completely turn off physical perception, and this (as most li!ely the reason (hy there (ere no short lapses in dreaming. If Roman (ere still unable to separate (hen using the techni1ue of standing up, or any other techni1ue besides intensifying the vibrations, he could have tried listening in, as there (as some noise. Instead of using his first phase e$perience to (or! on mastering the basic s!ills of deepening and maintaining, Roman immediately indulged in comple$ e$periments, (hich is (hy his multiple entries (ithin the same phase (ere brief, of poor 1uality, and not used effectively. 4ut this is all typical during initial e$periences and a lot

(as still accomplished, especially considering that a direct techni1ue (as used. The relative length of the phase (as achieved mainly than!s to complying (ith the single (ay to maintain the phase H repeated separation, (hich Roman managed to do five times.

+oD 0 Ale-ander &yrenkov StudentD ,osco7J :ussia My first entry happened at night( - &as lying in "ed and thin+ing a"out the phase, as - had "een una"le to fall asleep for a &hile( do*ed off for a $o$ent and then a&o+e again, this ti$e already in the proper state, and then easily rolled out B$ore or less unconsciously and refle#ively)( - &ent deeper "y $eans of touching and then falling headfirst( -t is a pity that -.ve already forgotten a lot of the e#perience, "ut - do re$e$"er that after deepening - fell right do&n onto the yard of $y grand$other.s house, "ut then lost consciousness, and so - returned into $y "ody and rolled out of it several ti$es( - &as una"le to sharpen all $y senses' 5hen deepened one sense Btouch, for e#a$ple), another Bi(e( sight) &ould fade a&ay( %fter that, - have a gap in $y $e$ory concerning $y travels Bconsciousness and lucidity &ere &ea+, and - fell asleep and >resurfaced? several ti$es), "ut - re$e$"er having "een to a lot of places( 0ereAs ho& the episode ended' - dove headfirst into &ater fro$ a high "oard Bafter first having deepened a "it), and then $y sense of touch gre& sharper' - felt >&ater? and hit $y head against a very soft >"otto$(? - resu$ed the interrupted fall through &illpo&er, "ut then it occurred to $e that $y grand$other &anted to &a+e $e up( My level of a&areness &as not 4uite ade4uate, as it did not occur to $e that - &as actually sleeping in a dor$itory, and not at $y grand$otherAs house( That.s &hy - decided that - needed to return to $y "ody( % sharp fall occurred right after that thought, and &as follo&ed "y sensations si$ilar to those one e#periences &hen hungover( =uestionsC -as a direct or indirect techni1ue applied. -hat made the implementation of the techni1ue successful. -hy (as 0le$ander e&ected into his grandmotherEs yard. -hile deepening, ho( could the problem of the senses being enhanced only one at a time have been solved. -hy did the practitioner have gaps in his

memory. -hat (ere the main problems associated (ith maintaining the phase. Ans7ers and Co((entsC 6espite the brief lapse in consciousness, the techni1ue used (as a direct one, and that very lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state, even though this (as 0le$anderDs first e$perience. The e&ection into his grandmotherEs yard (as spontaneous, and (as most li!ely caused by some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a habit of going there. ne$pected translocation often occurs (hen deepening (hile falling headfirst. Nuite possibly, in order to avoid having the senses of sight and touch enhance only one at a time, he should have simultaneously applied the techni1ues of touching and loo!ing out. 0s for maintaining the phase, there (ere three main problems that (ere also direct causes of the gaps in 0le$anderEs memory+ little depth, lac! of a clear plan of action, and non#compliance (ith the rules for maintaining the phase F(ith the e$ception of multiple entries after return to the bodyG. +oD 1 Svyatoslav Baranov StudentD Per(J :ussia - &o+e up on $y side( - didn.t feel li+e sleeping any$ore, "ut closed $y eyes any&ay( 5hen - lay do&n on $y "ac+, - i$$ediately felt the sensation that - &as a"out to fall fro$ the couch B- &as lying on the edge), and so$e +ind of lapse occurred, as if - &as "eing pulled so$e&here( - lay do&n once again, and this "u**ing started, and a green light appeared "efore $y eyes( - lay "ac+ even further, and $y eyelids started to flutter( - thought that - $ight fall fro$ the couch at that $o$ent, "ut then $y vision ca$e to $e, and - o"served that - &as already lying on the floor ne#t to the couch, - got up on $y feet and noticed that the roo$ &as >spinning? as if - &ere drun+, "ut everything 4uite 4uic+ly &ent "ac+ to nor$al( %t that very $o$ent, understood that this &as it, The phase itself,

-n ecstasy, - forgot a"out all the techni4ues and &ent to loo+ a"out the roo$( 2verything &as 1ust li+e in reality, "ut so$e things &ere out of place( - tried to levitate and "ent "ac+&ards, and &as so$eho& thrust outside( -t &as dus+ out there, and there &as a lot of sno& on the ground( - &ent around the house and tried to levitate( &as a"le to soar up&ards, and sa& the hori*on and sunset( But then "egan to lose altitude( %fter having flo&n to the &indo& on the other side of the house, - &anted to go up to the roof, "ut then a foul occurred( -n a fraction of a second, - had the sensation that - &as >no&here?( But then, $y real eyes opened B&ith difficulty) and there &as once again the feeling of so$e sort of lapse( %&areness &as di$ during the phase, apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep( =uestionsC -hat !ind of phase entrance techni1ue did 3vyatoslav use. -hich specific techni1ue produced results. -hich separation techni1ue (as employed. If separation (as unsuccessful, (hich techni1ue should have been immediately used. -hich important actions did he not perform enough after entering the phase. -hat should have been done after the foul. -hy (as a(areness dim during the phase. Ans7ers and Co((entaryC 0n indirect techni1ue (as employed. 'o phase state creation techni1ues (ere employed by 3vyatoslav. Instead, separation immediately (or!ed through rolling bac!(ards. If separation (ere unsuccessful, he should have proceeded (ith observing images, (hich (ould have been possible (ith the green light. 6eepening (as not immediately performed, no effort (as made to maintain, and there (as no appro$imation of a plan of actionI ho(ever, this is not a crucial factor during initial e$periences. 0nother attempt to enter the phase should have been made upon returning to the body, but this (as also forgotten. 0(areness (as dim and memory (as (ea! during the phase because of the initial shallo(ness of the state, (hich (as reflected in the perception of the surrounding and also the thought processes. +oD !4

Oleg Sushchenko S orts(anD ,osco7J :ussia Mast night - spent a"out an hour developing the interplay of i$ages in $y $ind after - no left felt any feeling of +inesthetic sense( - &as lying on $y "ac+ in an unco$forta"le position( %fter sliding to&ards sleep for so$e ti$e, - felt slight vi"rations and echoes of sounds fro$ the drea$ &orld, "ut the unco$forta"le position still hindered $e( -n the end, - thought the hec+ &ith it, and decided to lie do&n ho&ever &as co$forta"le, and turned over to lie on $y sto$ach( 3espite the fact that the $ove$ent upset the process, after a"out five $inutes the state "egan to return and "uild up( - &as a"le to get a little vi"ration this ti$e, although - &as una"le to a$plify it( - dre& a picture of $y +itchen in $y $ind, and "ecause the i$ages in that state &ere really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so$e ti$e understood that not only &ere $y attention and a&areness there, "ut so &ere $y "odily sensations( - &as 4uite surprised that the phase had "een so easy to fall in to Bthere &as no dou"t that this &as the phase)( - 1u$ped out through the &indo& and "egan to fly around the courtyard( %ctually, it &as the first ti$e that - had flo&n only upon a single $ental co$$and, &ithout any physical effort, as occurs during drea$s( The courtyard "ore only 1 7 si$ilarity to its reallife counterpart, "ut - &as not at all surprised "y this, and - si$ply en1oyed it as $uch as - could, as - &as a"le see and &as not i$$ediately thro&n out( But, after having loo+ed at and ta+en in the city, the thought of &hether or not this &as the phase and not 1ust a lucid drea$ occurred( - &as so conscious in the drea$ that - &as a"le to +no& a"out and co$prehend such ter$s, and differentiate "et&een the$ - can you i$agineG, - have to add that - gave little attention to $y $e$ory, so - can.t say ho& $uch of $y >selfa&areness? &as there, "ut - &as a&are enough to "e a"le to differentiate "et&een the phase and a lucid drea$ Bor at least thin+ a"out the difference)( - even &ent and as+ed people around if it &as the phase or a lucid drea$( Sounds funny, doesnAt itG The funniest thing &as that they ans&ered that it &as a different &orld, and they

refused to discuss the topic any further &ith $e( Then, - decided to not get $y $ind all $i#ed up and 1ust go &ith the plot, &hich turned out to "e 4uite long and uninterrupted, - recalled a $o$ent fro$ the day "efore ho& - had lain do&n and induced the phase &hile lying on $y "ac+, and ho& - had turned over and flo&n a&ay( - recalled all this periodically during the course of the phase, and reali*ed that should try to as+ a"out &hat had "een going on &ith $e on the foru$ later( Then, later in the phase, - found $yself in a "ase$ent( %s there &as 1ust a really nasty s$ell there, - decided that - had already had enough and that it &as ti$e to go "ac+( That happened even $ore easily, as soon as - thought a"out going "ac+, a vi"ration as light as a "ree*e &ent through $e and then - &as "ac+ in $y "ody &ith full a&areness and a &ell-rested "ody and $ind( - &as co$pletely refreshed, %nd that.s despite the fact that - re$e$"er everything, every second of the drea$, fro$ the $o$ent - started flying, =uestionsC -hich type of techni1ue helped Oleg enter the phase. -hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase, and could this have had a positive effect on later results. -hat can be said of techni1ues related to vibrations in the conte$t of OlegEs entry into the phase. -hich specific techni1ue brought him into the phase. -hich initial actions should have been ta!en upon entry into the phase. -hat (as lac!ing that could have lead to productive use of the phase. -as it (orth(hile to immediately translocate by &umping through the (indo(. -hat (as the cause of reflection on (hether the e$perience (as the phase or a conscious dream. -as it beneficial to try to offhandedly learn from ob&ects (hat type of state this (as. -hy did the desire to return bac! to the body arise, and (hat could have caused it. Ans7ers and Co((entaryC Oleg entered the phase using a direct techni1ue. 5e (as initially unable to enter due to the uncomfortable position that he had assumed, although lapses in consciousness into short dreams did occur. 'evertheless, the initially unsuccessful techni1ue still ended in a positive final outcome because the state that Oleg (as in (as close to the phase. 5o(ever, attention

should not have been given to vibration amplification techni1ues, especially straining the brain and straining the body (ithout using muscles, as they can be detrimental during direct techni1ues. The techni1ue of visuali=ation (as used immediately before entering the phase instead of observing images, (hich is used more often. Oleg deliberately con&ured the observed images instead of searching for them in front of himself, (hich is (here the difference bet(een the techni1ues lies. 5o(ever, he did not perform deepening upon entering the phase. 0dditionally, he had no clear plan of action to ensure that the phase (ould be productive 3tarting to translocate by &umping through (indo(s should only be done by those (ith a certain amount of e$perience since beginners sometimes perceive reality to be the phase, or the phase to be reality. The reason for the reflection on the nature of the phenomenon (as due to terminological confusion, (hich is 1uite (idespread. If a practitioner is a(are but does not feel the body as in the physical (orld, then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is (hy there (as no reason to in1uire about this among animate ob&ects. 6eliberately returning to the body (as a big mista!e. There (as no reason to thro( a(ay an opportunity to travel and use the phase. 4eginners are not often afforded such an opportunity. The reason for the return to the body in this case is most li!ely found in the absence of a plan of action and lac! of clear understanding of ho( the phase might be used for practical aims. +oD !! Ale-ander <elekov Co( uter Progra((erD Saint PetersburgJ :ussia - tried all night to use the %stral :atapult that cues you &hen you.re drea$ing, "ut - gave up on the idea after several unsuccessful a&a+enings and si$ply fell asleep( 5hen -A$ drea$ing - usually $ove "y ta+ing great leaps, $uch further than a +angaroo, a"out 1 -8 yards( This happens regularly in $y drea$s, and - usually i$$ediately reali*e that -A$ in a drea$( 3uring one of the leaps, reali*ed &hile air"orne that - &as drea$ing and also reali*ed that -

&as a"le to land in a s$all dirty pond( %s e#pected, - landed right in the pond and &ent deep under the &ater( %nd at that very $o$ent, found $yself in the stencil, &ith $y hands and head half stuc+ in it( - got a little nervous that this atte$pt &ould also "e unsuccessful, and so - i$$ediately tried to separate fro$ $y "ody( - &as una"le to get $y head or hands out, and for the first ti$e - tried to turn around round $y a#is and $anaged to get out( Then - either slipped do&n or fell fro$ the "ed, "ut - did not feel any pain( - cra&led for 1-2 $eters and then felt that - could go "ac+( - started to touch the rug and so$e other thing, though - don.t +no& e#actly &hat it &as as it &as dar+, and, lo and "ehold' &ithin 2 -8 seconds - pro"a"ly felt &hat s$all +ittens feel &hen their eyes open for the first ti$e( 2verything &as foggy and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the roo$ filled &ith light, and colors "eca$e "right and vivid( - tried very hard to restrain $y e#cite$ent, and, to $y surprise, &as a"le to( - &al+ed around $y apart$ent thin+ing a"out &hat - should do( Reali*ing that - did not have that $uch ti$e, - decided to tal+ to an elderly $an &ho &ould ans&er $y 4uestions( - decided that there &ould "e an o$niscient elderly $an "ehind the apart$entAs front door, &hich - &as a"out to open( %nd there he &as, half-"ald, a"out K years old, in a grey coat &aiting for $e( - as+ed hi$ the 4uestion, >5hat should - do to get into the phase $ore oftenG? But he started to tell $e a"out ho& he &as raped as a child( %nd to "e $ore precise, this &as already not an elderly $an, "ut an elderly &o$an( &as not very interested in hearing her story, thus - tried to $ove a&ay fro$ her, suggesting that &e could tal+ later( But the elderly &o$an &as persistent, and - did not &ant to offend her, "ecause thought that this &as an unusual drea$ &ith its o&n set of rules, and na$ely that once you have as+ed an old &o$an a 4uestion, you are supposed to "e courteous and listen to the entire ans&er( - &ent &ith her to the +itchen of $y apart$ent( The telephone suddenly rang( - got scared that the telephone &as ringing in $y apart$ent and &ould &a+e $e up, &hich is &hy - i$$ediately started to loo+ at $y hand in order to $aintain( But the sensations &ere 4uite sta"le, and - stopped doing that( Then, $e and this lady

&anted to coo+ so$ething in $y +itchen( She said that - could heat a frying pan &ithout gas( But - instead decided to try the techni4ue of putting the hands together and "lo&ing on the$, and returned "ac+ into $y "ody( =uestionsC -hich type of the entry into the phase did 0le$ander describe. -as the cueing program of any help. -hich type of anchor (as the leaping. -hy (as the onset of consciousness immediately follo(ed by a transition into the stencil, i.e., the real body, though not completely. -hich separation techni1ue helped him to get out of his body again. -hich techni1ue (as used for deepening. -hich techni1ue for materiali=ing an ob&ect (as used correctly. -hat should the procedure for obtaining information have been started (ith. -hat importance does a polite attitude to(ards elderly (omen in the phase have. -hy (as the return to body possible. -hat did 0le$ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the foul. Ans7ers and Co((entsC 0le$ander described an entry into the phase through dream consciousness. 4y and large, the onset of consciousness (as facilitated by prior (or! (ith the cueing program, (hich, though it failed to yield results, strengthened the necessary intention to enter the phase. The leaping that accompanied the onset of consciousness may be compared (ith the sensations of levitation that often lead to practitioners achieving dream consciousness. 3ince the techni1ues for deepening and maintaining (ere not used at the moment of dream consciousness, a return to the body, though partial, naturally occurred. 9urthermore, 0le$ander managed to apply a separation techni1ue that most resembled climbing out. 5e then managed to deepen correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a result. 6espite the lac! of a plan of action, the practitioner competently decided to do something useful and employed the techni1ue of finding through a door in order to locate an animate source of information. 5e should have first tried to test the sub&ect by as!ing special 1uestions to determine if the ob&ect (ould be able to provide information Fsee *hapter 1AG.

4eing polite to animate ob&ects in the phase is the prerogative of each person on an individual basis, but it hardly has any real basis. Most li!ely, the return to the body (as triggered by a failure to maintain, e$cessive thin!ing, or temporary passivity. pon e$iting the phase, 0le$ander should have tried to immediately return. 5o(ever, he failed to do so, even though he had returned to the phase after e$iting dream consciousness. 3uch a step should have been obvious due to an incomplete connection to the body.

+oD !# Boris Bender ,ovie TechnicianJ E- erienced Practitioner of the PhaseD ,osco7J :ussia - "eca$e conscious in $y drea$ al$ost i$$ediately after falling asleep( - &as in $y apart$ent standing in the corridor( Being surprised "y having so suddenly found $yself in the phase, - started to touch the &alls &ith $y hands to test their fir$ness or, Orealness,O as &ell as to intensify the phase "y touching( - entered the roo$( There &as a "ed standing ne#t to the &all, &ith $y $other sleeping on it( - could not see her face, only her "ody under the "lan+et( The roo$ and corridor &ere e#act replicas of their real-life counterparts( 5hile thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other, - suddenly started to feel so$e&hat uneasy( 5hen - approached the &indo&, - sa& a grotes4ue landscape "ehind it that &as si$ilar to pictures fro$ $ovies a"out catastrophes' a &asteland, houses in ruins, odd pileups of "uilding $aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age, craters fro$ e#plosions here and there, and - noticed hu$an figures in so$e places( Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that - &as ta+ing in a panora$ic vie& Bthe vie& fro$ the &indo& spanned 1H degrees and cut off at the hori*on, &hich is in fact al$ost e#actly as the vie& fro$ $y apart$ent is in real life), - turned "ac+ into the roo$ and started to touch the &ardro"e, and then +nelt do&n to touch the floor( %ll the &hile, $y fear had "een gro&ing stronger and stronger' "oth out of thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other and due to the vie& fro$ the &indo&( %n#iety turned into real fear &ithin a $atter of several seconds, and then graduated into terror and panic( - lost the a"ility to thin+ critically( - had only one thought' - had to go "ac+ to $y "ody( - darted "ac+ to $y "ed and suddenly found $yself lying on it( - closed $y eyes, "ut could not understand if - &ere in $y real "ody or still in the phase( My terror gre& even stronger &hen - halfopened $y eyes and sa& that $y $other &as getting up fro$ her "ed( She loo+ed li+e a character fro$ a horror $ovie and apparently &as hostile to $e(

- &anted to disappear, dissolve, and &a+e up, - hectically tried to recall the techni4ues for an e$ergency e#it fro$ the phase, "ut &ith poor results' - tried to free*e, rela# and touch $y fingers to $y toes in order to feel a connection &ith $y real "ody( %t so$e $o$ents felt li+e - had it, thin+ing, >The connection had "een restored,? opened $y eyes, "ut reali*ed that - &as still in the phase &hen - sa& that the roo$ had changed, and &as no& a&ash &ith gar"age( The fact that the atte$pts +ept ending &ith false a&a+enings &as driving $e cra*y( - &as especially shoc+ed &hen - got up after one of the false a&a+enings and sa& $y $other standing at $y "ed, still loo+ing threateningly at $e, li+e a va$pire or a *o$"ie fro$ a horror $ovie( Elus, she started to reach out to&ard $e &ith her hands, - nevertheless +ept on and tried to free*e and &iggle $y toes, this ti$e &ithout opening $y eyes, and not chec+ing &here - &as( started to cal$ do&n after so$e ti$e, "ut - &as una"le to feel $y real "ody, &hich &as confir$ed "y the fact that sounds &ere co$ing in fro$ the phase' - heard sparro&s chirping outside the &indo&, though it reality it &as too late for sparro&s to "e out( 0o&ever, the chirping and the associations that it "rought Bi(e( day, &ar$th, sparro&s, and sun), pro"a"ly helped $e a lot and cal$ed $e do&n, as - finally $anaged to sense $y real "ody and found $yself in reality( /evertheless, after - got up, - i$$ediately started to verify for a"out half a $inute that - &as no longer in the phase "y touching o"1ects, $a+ing sure that they &ere hard, and feeling all of $y "odily sensations( =uestionsC -hy (as there a ris! that 4oris could return to his body (hen ta!ing in the vie( from the (indo(. 5o( could 4oris have e$amined the panoramic vie( from the (indo( (ithout (orrying about a foul. -hich techni1ue for deepening and "maintaining% (as employed several times. -hat (ould have happened if 4oris translocated from the source of the fear to another place. 5o( could he have overcome this problem. -hy (as 4oris unable to easily e$it the phase and (hy (ere all of the techni1ues that he !ne( of no practical use.

Ans7ers and Co((entsC -hen e$amining distant ob&ects in the phase, there is al(ays a ris! of returning to oneDs body because the activity is rela$ing and rela$ation is detrimental to the length of a phase. 4oris could have continued to ta!e in the vie( by simultaneously !eeping up vibrations, periodically e$amining his hands, or rubbing them together. 6uring the entire length of 4orisDs phase, he performed sensory amplification by touching to deepen and maintain the phase. If he tried to run a(ay from his mother to another place in the phase, she probably (ould have caught up (ith him there any(ay. 5e should have tried to yell at her in an aggressive tone. This (ould have helped him to overcome his fear and either scare the ob&ect a(ay or ma!e it more agreeable. Problems (ith an emergency e$it from the phase arose because it (as the beginning of the night and the mind still needed to dream and, thus, !ept pulling him into that process. +oD !% Ale-ei Teslenko IT EngineerJ E- erienced Practitioner of the PhaseD ,osco7J :ussia %ctually, - &as not planning to travel that night, "ut &hen - &o+e up around $idnight - decided to try to enter the phase nevertheless( started to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s, "ut then a strong sleepy lethargy overca$e $e and - suddenly &anted to give up $y atte$pts to enter the phase and si$ply fall asleep( 0o&ever, &as persistent and continued to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s( -nstead of feeling the usual vi"rations that occur &hen this techni4ue is perfor$ed, - si$ply fell asleep and continued the phanto$ $ove$ents &hile drea$ing( Because of that, $y consciousness apparently did not fall asleep co$pletely, and "eca$e a&are that - &as drea$ing( - i$$ediately cli$"ed out of $y "ody( There &as no vision, conscious a&areness &as no $ore than 6 7, so the phase &as not that deep( -n order to $aintain the phase, - i$$ediately started

chaotically touching everything around $e( -t helped( Fision ca$e, though it &as $ur+y( - then found $yself in $y apart$ent( - decided to strive to deepen( 2ach ti$e that - e#ercised that techni4ue, the phase "eca$e deeper and deeper( %fter - had achieved a sta"le phase, - decided that it &ould "e good to gra" a snac+ and headed for the fridge( - should add that - &as on a strict diet at the ti$e and &as craving so$ething s&eet or fried( 0o&ever, &hen - opened the fridge, - &as 4uite disappointed( There &as a lot of food in the fridge, "ut all of it re4uired preparation Bra& $eat, fish, dill, etc()( 0o&ever, there &as a "ottle of spar+ling $ineral &ater on a special lo&er shelf in the fridge( 5ithout giving it any thought, - too+ the "ottle and started to chug it( %ll of the sensations &ere 1ust as in real life' - felt the "u""les fro$ the car"onation, that peculiar taste that $ineral &ater has, and also ho& the &ater &ent do&n $y throat( -n general, everything &as 4uite realistic, though there &as no sensation of $y sto$ach filling up &ith &ater and, $oreover, the &ater felt so$e&hat dry( -t sounds funny, "ut that very feeling of &ater.s dryness spoiled $y overall i$pression so$e&hat( %fter a foul, - reali*ed that a possi"le reason for this $ight have "een dryness in the $outh of $y real "ody( <sually, if there are, for e#a$ple, candies in the +itchen or in the fridge, - actually ta+e a handful of the$ and consu$e the$ &hile traveling through the phase( %fter going to the fridge, - &anted to see so$ething interesting( decided to e$ploy the techni4ue for creating o"1ects and people, and so - closed $y eyes and focused on the i$age of a girl &ho$ &anted to see at that very $o$ent( - affir$ed $y desire, and - then opened $y eyes, concentrating on the area to $y side( The air gre& $isty at first, and then the person - &as e#pecting $ateriali*ed out of the air, and ca$e to life, see$ingly fully autono$ous and &ith free &ill - she had the sa$e $anner of spea+ing as in real life, and acted in the sa$e &ay( The foul happened &hile $y conversation &ith the girl &as in full s&ingP =uestionsC -hich type of the techni1ue did 0le$ei ultimately use. -hy did lethargy and dro(siness arise during phantom

(iggling. -hat should be done in this type of situation. -hat (as most li!ely lac!ing (hen the indirect techni1ue (as performed, and (hy did the e$perience end (ith 0le$ei falling asleep. -hat techni1ues for deepening (ere used. -hat could have been done to 1uic!ly fill the fridge (ith ready#to#eat food. -hich techni1ue for finding an ob&ect (as used (ith regard to the girl. -hat else could have been used for the same purpose, considering 0le$eiEs actions. -hat should have been done immediately after the foul. 5o( many practical applications of the phase did 0le$ei manage to try. Ans7ers and Co((entsC The entry to the phase happened because 0le$ei had become a(are that he (as dreaming (hile he rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and dro(siness over the course of the unsuccessful attempt (ith the indirect techni1ue of phantom (iggling. sually, such dro(siness signifies that a phase is approaching, signaling a need for aggression, activeness and attention in order to overcome inertia and enter the phase. 5o(ever, attentiveness (as lac!ing, so 0le$ei fell asleep. 5o(ever, his desire to enter the phase (as so strong that the phantom (iggling continued even (hile he (as dreaming, causing him to e$perience dream consciousness. 0mong techni1ues employed for deepening (ere sensory amplification through touching and &ogging. It (ould have been sufficient to employ the techni1ue of finding through a door to ensure that the fridge (as properly stoc!ed. 9or e$ample, 0le$ei should have closed the door on the refrigerator, focused his attention on a full stoc! of snac!s and food, and then opened the door to discover that everything heDd envisioned (as there. The techni1ue for finding an ob&ect through transformation (as used to ma!e the girl appear, but this techni1ue should be considered only by e$perienced practitioners because it can lead to a foul in case of insufficient concentration. 4efore employing the techni1ue, 0le$ei shut his eyes, and only then imagined the girl right in front of him. 5e could have immediately created her using the techni1ue of closed eyes, (hich usually is easier to do since there is no direct visual contact (ith surroundings.

pon returning to his body, he should have tried to separate again. 0ltogether, 0le$ei managed to and ma!e progress in t(o specific, applied tas!s, though did not complete them satisfactorily.

E-ercises for Cha ter !#

Tasks Try to assess the e$periences described above using the rubric belo(. The ans(ers are located in the appendi$. *-Point Syste( for Assessing the =uality of Out-of-Body E- eriences @PhasesA 6eliberate entry into the phase using any techni1ue The phase (orld (as realistic or (as made realistic Phase (as of average or above#average duration F) minutes or moreG 6eliberate use of the phase to (or! to(ards a specific goal 6eliberately studying the phase or e$perimenting (ith it (hile in it. If there is some doubt any regarding any item, only half a point should be a(arded.

P1 P1 P1 P1 P1

Cha ter !% - Putting a 2ace on the Pheno(enon

Ste hen <aBerge 3tephen /a4erge (as born in 1@:> in the nited 3tates. 0t the age of 1@, he received a 4achelorDs 6egree in mathematics from 0ri=ona 3tate niversity, after (hich he enrolled as a graduate student in the *hemistry program at 3tanford niversity. In 1@<@, he too! an academic leave of absence. 5e returned to 3tanford in 1@>> and began studying the human mind, including sub&ects related to dreaming. /a4erge received his Ph.6. in psychophysiology in 1@?A. 5e founded the /ucidity Institute in 1@?>. 3tephen /a4erge has made the largest scientific contribution to the study of phase states. It suffices to say that /a4erge (as the first in the (orld to prove during a full#fledged scientific e$periment that it is possible to become conscious (hile dreaming This (as done through logging specific signals made (ith the eyes by a person dreaming (hile sleeping under measurement instruments. These e$periments also proved that eye movement in the physical body and perceived body are synchronous. Mucid 3rea$ing, first published in 1@?;, is /a4ergeEs most (ell# !no(n boo!. 2#ploring the 5orld of Mucid 3rea$ing, a boo! that /a4erge (rote (ith 5o(ard Rheingold, (as published in 1@@A. It (as mainly than!s to the efforts of /a4erge that mind#machines for achieving dream consciousness (ere created, such as 6ream/ight, 'ova6reamer, and 6reamMa!er.

The !ey feature of /a4ergeDs (or! and achievements is an absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon. 0rguably, he is one of the fe( authors and researchers totally lac!ing in irrationality. ,verything that can be read and learned from his boo!s is verifiable and accessible for everyone, (ith no peddling of out#of#this#(orld superpo(ers. Carlos Castaneda 6ue to *arlos *astanedaDs desire to follo( the spiritual practice of the -arriorDs Path, (hich entails erasing oneDs personal history, the details of his biography are unclear. 0s far as *astanedaDs early years are concerned, it can only be stated that he (as born outside of the nited 3tates sometime bet(een 1@); and 1@7;. 5e enrolled at the niversity of *alifornia, /os 0ngeles F */0G in the 1@<As, (here he received a Ph.6. in anthropology on the basis of his boo!s. *astanedaDs entire life path (as devoted to studying the teachings of a certain Cuan Matus or don Cuan *achora. It is more than li!ely that his persona is a composite#image of an Indian 3haman, a sorcerer, and an heir of the culture of the ancient "Toltecs%. *astaneda (rote a do=en boo!sI ho(ever, the boo! The %rt of 3rea$ing F1@@7G has the most to do (ith the phase state. It contains several effective techni1ues for entering the phase through dream consciousness. 5is sub&ect matter is soa!ed in a large amount of mysticism and virtually devoid of any pragmatism. 6espite the fact that the main orientation of *astanedaDs (or! did not touch upon the phase state, he nevertheless became one of the founding fathers of this field, as his general popularity reached massive proportions (orld(ide. *arlos *astaneda passed a(ay in 1@@?.

:obert AD ,onroe Robert Monroe (as born in the nited 3tates in 1@1;. In 1@7>, he graduated from Ohio 3tate niversity (ith a degree in ,ngineering. 5e (or!ed for some time as a radio program producer and director until he established his o(n radio company in 'e( Oor!, (hich rapidly e$panded. In 1@;<, his company also conducted a study about the effect of sound (aves on the abilities of the mind. In 1@;?, Monroe had an accidental personal e$perience (ith the phase phenomenon, (hich strongly sto!ed his interest in the sub&ect to (hich he (ould devote his entire career. In 1@>:, he founded the Monroe Institute, (hich (as entirely devoted to studying unusual states of consciousness and the ability to influence them through audio stimulation and other technologies. One of its main achievements (as the creation of the 5emi#3ync system, (hich (as designed to help a person reach altered states of consciousness, including out#of#body states, by synchroni=ing the t(o hemispheres of the brain. 5is first boo!, Journeys Out of the Body, (as published in 1@>1. T(o boo!s then follo(ed+ Far Journeys F1@?;G and <lti$ate Journey F1@@:G. Robert Monroe has, so far, made the largest contribution to(ard populari=ing the phase state. 5o(ever, he understood the phase more as an actual e$it of the mind from the body, (hich is (hy the term "out#of#body e$perience% FO4,G (as introduced. The boo! Journeys Out of the Body (as such a massive success that Monroe 1uic!ly became an undisputed authority in the field. 5o(ever, the large influence of mysticism on MonroeDs (or! and vie(s cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent after his second boo!. The ma&ority of phenomena described in the boo! have not been verified in practice. The only attempt at conducting a full#

fledged scientific e$periment proving that the mind left the body (as unsuccessful. In the end, typical misconceptions about the phase became (idespread, as did a(areness of the e$istence of out#of#body e$periences. Robert Monroe passed a(ay in 1@@;. Patricia Garfield Patricia 2arfield (as born in 1@7: in the nited 3tates. 9rom the age of 1:, she !ept an uninterrupted daily dream &ournal that (ould allo( her and all of humanity great insight into dreams phenomena associated (ith the phase. 3he (as one of the founders of The 0ssociation for the 3tudy of 6reams. 6r. 2arfield holds a Ph.6. in clinical psychology. 3he is the author of a great number of boo!s, (ith the 1@>: best# seller :reative 3rea$ing being the most (idely lauded. It (as one of the first pieces of literature to approach the phase state in a practical and non#specialist (ay, and received (orld(ide interest and appreciation. The boo! contains good practical guidelines and also describes the dreaming practices of various cultures. Sylvan ,uldoon

3ylvan Muldoon (as born in the nited 3tates in 1@A7. 5e is considered to be the 0merican pioneer in the study of the phase, although he used the esoteric term astral. 5e inadvertently (o!e up in the phase at the age of 1), (here he sa( a cord connecting his perceived body to his real body. Muldoon first thought that he (as dying during the e$perience, although he eventually concluded that this (as an instance of "astral pro&ection%. 5e had repeated e$perience (ith the phenomenon, but Muldoon (as still unable to become an advanced practitioner due to a lac! of full control over the practice. 0fter coordinating efforts (ith 5ere(ard *arrington, the famous 0merican investigator of the un!no(n, the t(o published the sensational, &ointly authored boo! The Ero1ection of the %stral Body in 1@)@. The authors published t(o other boo!s+ The :ase for %stral Ero1ection F1@7<G and The Eheno$ena of %stral Ero1ection F1@;1G. 6espite a large serving of esotericism, MuldoonDs boo!s, Fespecially the first oneG contain a lot of helpful, practical information and e$planation of the most diverse phenomena that can occur during the phase. 5o(ever, Muldoon is considered to be the greatest populari=er of irrational esoteric terms and theories, (hich subse1uently became 1uite (idespread. 3ylvan Muldoon passed a(ay in 1@>1. Charles <eadbeater *harles /eadbeater (as born in ,ngland in 1?:> F1?;: according to some sourcesG. 0fter dropping out of O$ford due to hard times, /eadbeater became an ordained priest, but then became 1uite active in the occult. This led to his becoming a member of the Theosophical 3ociety in 1??7. /eadbeater became one of its most famous participants.

The combination of a bright mind, scientific !no(ledge, and interest in the paranormal led him to publish many boo!s on many diverse topics. One of them, 3rea$s' 5hat They %re and 0o& They %re :aused F1?@?G, (as one of the first (or!s to touch upon the phenomenon of the phase. /eadbeaterDs (riting is saddled (ith a ton of esoteric terms and theories. In it, the term astral plane is predominantly used for the phase. 'evertheless, the boo! is not (ithout some helpful guidelines concerning techni1ues. *harles /eadbeater passed a(ay in 1@7:.

:obert Bruce Robert 4ruce (as born in ,ngland in 1@;;. 5e has performed his lifeEs (or! (hile living in 0ustralia. 0fter studying and promoting dissociative phenomena for many years, by the beginning of the )1st century he had become one of the leading authorities in the field. 5e is also a specialist in many other paranormal fields of study. Robert 4ruce (rote several boo!s, the most important and (ell !no(n of (hich is %stral 3yna$ics F1@@@G. The author holds 1uite open esoteric vie(s, (hich are very strongly reflected in his theories and terminology. The helpful, practical guidelines in his boo!s are 1uite often loaded (ith a large amount of information that has not been verified or proven by anyone. Robert 4ruce is also a propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes concerning the phase phenomenon. :ichard )ebster Richard -ebster (as born in 'e( Qealand, (here he still resides. 5e is the author of about ;A publications that have sold many millions of copies around the (orld. 5o(ever, only one of them, %stral Travel for Beginners, is completely devoted to the phase state. The boo! is saturated (ith (idespread misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and misguided theories trying to e$plain it. The techni1ue#related aspect of the boo! is also presented ineffectively. It is 1uite li!ely that the author himself has no practical e$perience, (hich can also be said for the contents of his other do=ens of boo!s devoted to various topics.

Charles Tart *harles Tart (as born in the nited 3tates in 1@7>. 5e received his Ph. 6. in psychology in 1@<7 at the niversity of 'orth *arolina. Tart also received training at 3tanford niversity. 5e (as one of the founders of transpersonal psychology. 5e became one of the most preeminent researchers of unusual states of a(areness after the publication of %ltered States of :onsciousness F1@<@G, the first boo! that he (or!ed on. It (as one of the first boo!s to e$amine entering the phase through dream consciousness. The boo! received popularity (hen the use /36 and Mari&uana (ere often vie(ed as vehicles to elevated consciousness, and the boo! even describes the use of chemical substances in the conte$t of phase states.

Cha ter !' " 2inal Test

The 1uestions on the test may have one or more correct ans(ers, or none of the ans(ers may be correct. Thus, the 1uestions must be read completely through, and attention must be paid to their implications and finer points. 0 studentDs theoretical !no(ledge is considered to be satisfactory if the correct ans(ers to at least one#half of the 1uestions are given. If a score of less than ;AJ is received, a student should study the (ea! points again or re#read the entire guideboo!. Other(ise, it is 1uite probable that fundamental mista!es (ill be made, (hich (ill in turn interfere (ith individual practice. If a score of at least ?AJ is achieved, then a theoretical !no(ledge of the practice is at an advanced level, (hich (ill surely have a positive effect on the practitionerDs direct e$periences in the phase. 0ns(ers are in the appendi$ at the end of the guideboo!. !D +oise and realistic i(ages une- ectedly arise 7hen erfor(ing the indirect techni$ue of hanto( 7igglingD )hat can be done; 0G *ontinue (ith phantom (iggling. 4G 3(itch to observing images or listening in. *G Try to do all or some of the techni1ues simultaneously. 6G *hoose the techni1ue (ith the strongest precursors and continue (ith that one.

#D A ractitioner unintentionally o ens the eyes for several seconds u on a7akeningD )hat is the best 7ay to start indirect techni$ues fro( in this case; 0G 0ttempting to separate. 4G The observing images techni1ue. *G The rapid eye movement techni1ue. 6G The forced falling asleep techni1ue. ,G ItDs best to not start any techni1ue and fall bac! to sleep (ith the intention of rea(a!ening and trying to do everything again (ithout first moving. %D )hich actions are referable for erfor(ing a direct techni$ue before falling aslee for the night after a long eriod of slee de rivation or e-haustion; 0G Monotonously performing the observing images techni1ue. 4G 4eing attentive and concentrating on actions. *G The absence of a free#floating state of consciousness. 6G Nuic!ly alternating techni1ues. ,G 5igh#1uality rela$ation. 'D ,ild vibrations occur 7hen erfor(ing a direct techni$ueD Can the straining the brain techni$ue be used to a( lify the vibrations; 0G Oes. 4G 'o. *G It may be used, but for practical purposes # only (hen a practitioner is e$hausted or sleep#deprived. 6GIt may be used, as long as the attempt to enter the phase is not being made during the day *D )hich of the actions given belo7 increase the likelihood of entering the hase through drea( consciousness 7hen used right before falling aslee ; 0G Performing direct techni1ues.

4G Intending to perform indirect techni1ues upon a(a!ening. *G Recalling dreams from the night before. 6G *reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance to the phase in such a (ay. .D If a7areness occurs at the very last (o(ent of a drea( that fades a7ayJ 7hich of the actions given belo7 should be undertaken in order to enter the hase as soon as ossible; 0G Try to fall asleep again in order to once again become self#a(are (hile dreaming. 4G Immediately perform indirect techni1ues. *G Ta!e a brea! and perform direct techni1ues later. 6G 3tart to recall that nightDs dreams. /D )hich of these are (ost likely to roduce a $uick hase entry 7hen a7akening in a state of slee aralysis; 0G Rela$ation. 4G 9alling asleep (ith the intention of becoming self#a(are (hile in a dream. *G Moving the physical eyes and tongue. 6G 6irect techni1ues. 0D )hat should be done 7hen s ontaneously thro7n fro( the body 7hile lying do7n or 7aking u in the (iddle of the night; 0G Return to the body and perform appropriate separation techni1ues. 4G Implement a predetermined plan of action for the phase. *G 6eepen immediately. 6G Try to 1uic!ly establish vision, if it is not already present. 6G ,mploy the forced falling asleep techni1ue. 1D )hile trying to enter the haseJ rolling out 7orks at firstJ but only artiallyJ and the (ove(ent cannot be e-tended any

further no (atter 7hat effort is (adeD )hat is it best to do in this situation; 0G Try to turn bac! and roll out further once again, and repeat several times. 4G 3tart doing cycles of indirect techni1ues. *G Ta!e a brea! and try to separate after several minutes. 6G Try to separate by levitating, getting up, or climbing out. ,G se any indirect techni1ue for phase entry and attempt rolling out again. !4D A ractitioner une- ectedly gets stuck in the floor or 7all 7hile rolling outD )hat should be done to resu(e the hase; 0G 9orce through the obstacle. 4G ,mploy translocation techni1ues. *G 0ttempt to return to the body and roll out again. 6G 4ecome able to locate an e$it from the problem. ,G Perform sensory amplification. !!D 8o7 (ay a ractitioner dee en the hase 7hile flying through a dark for(less s ace 7hile se arating; 0G ,mploy the techni1ue of falling headfirst. 4G There is no (ay to do this. *G *reate and amplify vibrations. 6G 4egin self#palpation. ,G Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it through sensory amplification. !#D If dee ening techni$ues do not co( letely 7ork 7ithin !* to %4 secondsJ 7hat can be done; 0G *ontinue trying to go deeper. 4G ,$it from the phase. *G 0ttempt to return to the body and once use phase entrance techni1ues. 6G Proceed to performing predetermined actions.

!%D )hich techni$ue or 7ay of (aintaining the hase should be used 7hen tele orting so(e7here 7ith closed eyes; 0G The techni1ue of amplifying and maintaining vibrations. 4G Tactile sensory amplification, feeling the sensation of rubbing the hands together. *G 'o techni1ue. 6G The techni1ue of rotation. ,G Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase. !'D In 7hich situations is falling aslee in the hase (ost likely; 0G -hen loo!ing for a desired person. 4G -hen communicating (ith animate ob&ects. *G -hen completely calm, having completely halted all activity. 6G -hen travelling aimlessly. ,G -hen ta!ing part in side events. !*D )hich of the follo7ing indicators guarantees that the hase has been e-ited for reality; 0G 0 cloc! sho(s the right time, and the same time even if a practitioner turns a(ay from it and then loo!s at it again. 4G 3ensations are completely realistic. *G The presence of friends or family in the room (ho communicate (ith the practitioner. 6G 0n inner feeling that the phase has ended. ,G 'othing happens after staring at the end of a finger from close distance for five to 1A seconds. !.D In 7hich situations should travelling in the hase be deliberately discontinued; 0G -hen a fear that a return (ill be impossible, or a direct fear of death arises. 4G -hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner (ill be late for something in the physical (orld.

*G -hen frightened by some strange events or ob&ects. 6G -hen there is an ine$plicable mortal fear of something un!no(n or incomprehensible. ,G If someone in the phase strongly insists that the practitioner should return to reality. 9G If sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by interaction (ith ob&ects in the phase (orld. !/D )hat 7ill (ost likely occur 7hen trying to evade so(e a7ful being or dangerous erson; 0G The ob&ect (ill get bored and stop. 4G 9ear of the ob&ect (ill go a(ay. *G The phase (ill occur more fre1uently, as (ell as be longer and deeper than usual. 6G The practitioner (ill become calmer and unnerved less fre1uently. ,G The more fear there is, the more often the ob&ect (ill chase the practitioner. !0D )hen should establishing vision in the hase be consideredJ if it has not occurred on its o7n; 0G Immediately upon separation (ithout deepening. 4G Immediately after deepening. *G -hile flying through dar! space during translocation. 6G 0fter five to 1A seconds of being sure that a phase entry has occurred. ,G -hen there is a desire to immediately e$plore the surroundings after separation has occurred. !1D 8o7 is it ossible to ass through a 7all 7hile standing close to itJ 7ithout sto ing to look at it fro( close range; 0G 4y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it, and then the entire body and head. 4G 4y gradually pushing the head through it at first, and then the entire body.

*G 4y trying to put a hole in it, and then e$panding the hole and climbing through it. 6G 4y ramming it (ith a shoulder, trying to bring it do(n. #4D )hile in the haseJ a ractitioner is in a situation 7here the ar(s are totally aralyHed and i((obiliHedD This ha ens in a roo( 7ith a single e-itC a door that has started to closeD )hat are the t7o easiest 7ays to kee the door o en; 0G Order the door to stay open in a loud, imperious, and assertive manner. 4G 9ree the arms and hold bac! the door. *G 3top the door (ith tele!inesis. 6G *reate a person through the method of finding. ,G There is no (ay to do this. #!D )hat difficulties (ay arise for a ractitioner in the hase 7hile using the door techni$ue of translocation; 0G The door (ill not open. 4G The (rong place is behind the door. *G It is not possible to use the hand to pull the door handle because the hand goes through the handle. 6G 6ifficulties (ith internal concentration occur at the critical moment. ,G 0 blac! void often appears on the other side of the door. ##D )hat are necessary conditions for getting results 7hen translocating in the hase after rolling out during initial se aration fro( the body; 0G 0bsence of vision. 4G Practicing after sunset. *G 0 firm intention to end up some(here. 6G *ertainty of the final result. ,G The presence of vibrations.

#%D A ractitioner is in a dark roo( in the hase 7here everything is oorly visibleD There is a chandelierJ but no light s7itchD 8o7 can the s7itch be activated to light the roo(; 0G Translocate through teleportation to the place (here the toggle or s(itch for the light in 1uestion is located. 4G 9ind a flashlight through the method of finding and illuminate the room (ith it. *G Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier (ith the hands. 6G *reate a light s(itch in the room using the method of finding an ob&ect. ,G *lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already lit, and then open the eyes. #'D )hen co((unicating 7ith an ani(ate ob3ect in the haseJ a desire to add a s ecific erson to the scenery arisesD )hich of the follo7ing actions are advisable only for beginners in this case; 0G Propose going to a neighboring room (here the needed sub&ect (ill be presented through the use of the door or corner techni1ue. 4G 3ummon the needed person by calling their name loudly. *G Translocate bac! to the same place, and have both animate ob&ects present there upon your return. 6G 0dd the needed person through the closed eyes techni1ue. ,G 0s! the animate ob&ect that you are tal!ing to if it does not mind adding someone to the scenery. #*D )here is one not allo7ed to go using translocation techni$ues; 0G Inside a mammoth. 4G To the past or the future. *G To heaven. 6G To an episode of the movie Star 5ars.

#.D 8o7 7ill a deceased erson differ fro( a rototy e in the hase 7hen correctly erfor(ing the techni$ue for finding the erson; 0G Only the practitioner himself can con&ure up differences, or not see or perceive them. 4G The deceased (ill have a different timbre of voice. *G There (ill be a radiant halo around the deceasedDs head. 6G Physical perception of the deceased (ill be less realistic than in real life. ,G The deceased (ill not remember anything. #/D )hat difficulties can arise in the hase 7hile obtaining infor(ation fro( ani(ate sources of infor(ation; 0G Inability to remember information obtained. 4G 3ources of information are silent. *G Inade1uateness of the sources of information. 6G 3e$ual attraction, if the source of information is of the opposite or desired se$. ,G 4eing given false information. #0D 8o7 (ight a ractitioner accelerate the healing rocess of a cold that is characteriHed by a stuffy nose and a sore throat; 0G Maintaining and amplifying vibrations for the entire length of the phase, and entering it over several days in a ro(. 4G Ta!ing aspirin and entering the phase over several days in a ro(. *G Travelling to hot places in the phase and entering it over several days in a ro(. 6G ,$periencing stressful situations over several phases. ,G 9inding a doctor in the phase and as!ing him (hat it is best to do in real#life or even in the phase itself. #1D )hich of the follo7ing achieve(ents belong to Ste hen <aBerge; 0G 9ounding the /ucidity Institute.

4G 0 Ph.6. in anthropology. *G 3cientifically proving that lucid dreaming is possible. 6G 0 Ph.6. in psychophysiology. ,G Proving that eye movements in the phase and in reality are synchroni=ed. %4D )ho of a roached the study of the hase state fro( a rag(atic oint-of-vie7 that 7as totally devoid of occultis(; 0G 3tephen /a4erge 4G Robert Monroe *G 3ylvan Muldoon 6G *harles /eadbeater ,G Patricia 2arfield 9G *arlos *astaneda

endi-

ASSESS,E+T O2 P:ACTITIO+E:S6 EEPE:IE+CES @C8APTE: !#A These assessments of the practitionersD e$periences refer only to the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not meant as an assessment of their practice as a (hole. 3ome of practitioners (ould easily be able to e$perience successful phases earning four to five points at other times. This especially concerns 4oris Pronya!in, 0le$ander 6yren!ov, 4oris 4ender, and 0le$ei Teslen!o. This is also possibly true of the other practitioners, (ith (hom the author is not closely ac1uainted. 'o. 1 4oris Pronya!in H A.; points 'o. ) 0le$ei 4a!harev H A.; points 'o. 7 6mitry Mar!ov H A points 'o. : Ivan Oa!ovlev H 1.; points 'o. ; 'atalya Bo=henova H 1 point 'o. < 0le$ander 9urmen!ov H 1 point 'o.> Roman Reutov H 7 points 'o. ? 0le$ander 6yren!ov H 1.; points 'o. @ 3vyatoslav 4aranov H ) points 'o. 1A Oleg 3ushchen!o H ).; points 'o. 11 0le$ander /ele!ov H 1.; points 'o. 1) 4oris 4ender H ) points 'o. 17 0le$ei Teslen!o H 7 points

A+S)E:S TO T8E 2I+A< TEST @C8APTE: !'A 1. 0,4,*,6I ). 6I 7. 4, *, 6I :. *I ;. 0,4,*,6I <. 4I >. H ?. *I @. 0, 6, ,I 1A. 4, *I 11. 0,*,6,,I 1). 0,6,0P6I 17. *I 1:. 6, ,I 1;. ,I 1<. 4, 9I 1>. *, ,I 1?. 4, 6I 1@. H )A. 0, *I )1. 0, 4, 6I )). 0, *, 6I )7. ,I ):. 4I );. HI )<. 0I )>. 4,*,6,,I )?. 4,*,,I )@. 0,*,6,,I 7A. 0, ,I

A SI,P<I2IE& &ESC:IPTIO+ O2 T8E EASIEST ,ET8O& 2O: E+TE:I+G T8E P8ASE 5SI+G I+&I:ECT TEC8+I=5ES pon a(a!ening, (ithout moving or opening the eyes, immediately try to separate from oneEs body. The separation attempt should be carried out (ithout any imagining, but rather (ith the desire to ma!e a real movement (ithout straining the muscles Frolling out, levitation, standing up, etc.G. If separation does not occur (ithin three to five seconds, immediately try alternating several of the most effective techni1ues for three to five seconds each. -hen one of the techni1ues (or!s, continue it for a longer period of time+ # Observing images+ Try to e$amine and discern the pictures arising before closed eyes. # /istening in+ 0ttempt to hear sounds in the head and ma!e these louder by listening in or strengthening the (illI # Rotating+ Imagine rotating around the head#to#foot a$isI # Phantom (iggling+ Try to move a part of the body (ithout straining the muscles, and try to increase the range of movementI # 3training the brain+ Try straining the brain, (hich (ill lead to vibrations that may also be intensified by straining the brain.

0s soon as one techni1ue clearly starts to (or!, continue (ith it as long as progress is apparent, and then try to separate. If separation fails, return to the techni1ue that (as (or!ing. 6o not give up alternating through techni1ues until one minute has elapsed, but do not continue for more than t(o minutes. 3eparation from the body may be attempted periodically, especially if interesting sensations occur. TA>E PA:T I+ :ESEA:C8 Ta!e part in the research of a techni1ue. The techni1ue of imagined sensations is described in *hapter ) in the section on 3econdary Techni1ues. This techni1ue is also commonly !no(n as the "cell phone techni1ue%. -hile this guideboo! (as being (ritten, e$periments (ith this techni1ue (ere conducted at the 3chool of Out# of#4ody TravelDs seminars. Results (ere astounding. 6ue to the fact that this techni1ue is easy to understand and apply in practice, it could be the most straightfor(ard and effective one for achieving the phase state. 0lmost every second attempt made (ith this techni1ue has yielded results, provided it is employed as an indirect techni1ue. 6ue to this techni1ueDs huge potential for populari=ing and spreading !no(ledge of the phenomenon, anyone (ho is interested is invited to ta!e part in a global e$periment of the techni1ueDs effectiveness. In addition to testing it, a researcher may propose the techni1ue to interested persons or post it on the Internet to increase the number of practitioners. Please submit the results of your e$periments (ith the techni1ue to the e#mail address+
obe4u@obe4u.com

5ere it is+ T8E CE<< P8O+E TEC8+I=5E The practice of this phase entry techni1ue is to imagine the sensation that something is resting in the hand, desirably upon a(a!ening (ithout any physical movement. It is best to imagine a

cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 1uite accustomed to this sensation, although any other ob&ect (ill do. It is necessary to actively and attentively focus on the sensations in the palm of the hand. Most li!ely, the physical sensation of a phone lying in the hand (ill 1uic!ly arise. The sensation (ill become increasingly palpable. If a sensation does not arise (ithin 1A seconds, the techni1ue not going to (or! and it is time to s(itch to another one. -hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs, focus every bit of attention on it. It should be noted that this (ill not be an imagined sensation, but a real one. This should be understood from the very beginning, and results should be e$pected. Once the sensation is stable, start feeling the mobile phone (ith the fingers. Physical sensations should be e$perienced. The physical body, of course, must not move or strain. If this does not (or!, only focus attention on the sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to feel the phone (ith the fingers later. If feeling the phone (ith the fingers is successful, actively roll the phone around the hand, feeling all of its details. 0s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in the hand, separation from the body may be attempted. In this case it is usually easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up. *ontinue to hold the phone and roll it around, (hich (ill maintain the emerging phase state. 3eparation in this case should be more li!e actually getting up physically or rolling out of bed, rather than actually separating one thing from something else. That is, do this in the same (ay as physically getting out of bed, starting from the sensation of the phone in the hand. If separation is unsuccessful, continue to attentively feel the phone in the hand for a little (hile longer and try to separate again. If separation happens, the ne$t step is to ta!e actions that are typical for a phase e$perience+ deepening, and then accomplishing predetermined tas!s (hile performing "maintaining% techni1ues. If only a partial separation occurs, then separation by force should be attempted.

2enerally, the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises (ith every second attempt. 9urthermore, achieving success only re1uires e$perience and some de$terity since feeling the sensation of a phone in the hand signifies that the re1uired state has been reached and subse1uent actions may be attempted. ATTE+TIO+F -hen ma!ing attempts to enter the phase, the practitioner should have complete confidence that he (ill be immediately successful in everything. ,ven a shroud of doubt (ill !eep the practitioner in his body, this is especially true (hen it comes to indirect techni1ues. 9our typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered by @AJ of practicioners+ 1 # 9orgetting to deepen the phase ) # 9orgetting to maintain the phase 7 # 0bsence of a plan of action (hen in the phase : # 9orgetting to try to re#enter the phase after a foul T8E SC8OO< O2 O5T-O2-BO&9 T:A?E< Michael RadugaDs 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel conducts training seminars in many countries around the (orld. The course(or! allo(s students to master the phase phenomenon and hone their s!ills at traveling in the phase. Information on e$isting branches and seminar schedules are available on the (ebsite www.obe4u.com. -e also (elcome potential partners interested in organi=ing 3chool of Out#of#4ody Travel branches and seminars. 0ll correspondence regarding seminars, partnerships, and proposals related to the translation of this boo! may be handled by e#mail at obe4u@obe4u.com . B:IE2 G<OSSA:9 O2 TE:,S A+& &E2I+ITIO+S

Out-of-Body e- erience @OBEAJ lucid drea(ing @<&AJ astral " a number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in (hich a person, (hile being fully conscious, reali=es consciousness outside the normal range of physical perception. Indirect techni$ues H entry into the phase (ithin five minutes of a(a!ening from sleep of any duration # provided there has been minimal physical movement. &irect techni$ues H entry into the phase (ithout any prior sleep, after e$cessive physical movement upon a(a!ening, or having been a(a!e for at least five minutes. &rea( Consciousness H entry into the phase through becoming consciously a(are (hile a dream episode is happening. &issociation H separationI in this case, a scientific term describing e$periences in the phase. Slee aralysis H a stuporI the complete immobili=ation that often occurs (hen falling asleep, a(a!ening, and entering or e$iting the phase. Stencil H the real physical body that is no longer perceived (hile in the phase. &ee ening the hase H methods for ma!ing the phase as realistic as possible by stabili=ing the surrounding space. ,aintaining the hase H methods for maintaining the phase state by preventing a lapse into sleep, a return to reality, or an imagined return to reality. :E, H rapid eye movement sleep FR,M phaseGI a sleep phase that is characteri=ed by increased brain activity that is accompanied by rapid eye movement and dreaming. 2oul H an inadvertent termination of the phase through a spontaneous return to everyday reality. Cycles of indirect techni$ues ## the easiest (ay to enter the phase, employed by rapidly alternating certain techni1ues upon a(a!ening from sleep until one of them (or!s.

SC8OO< O2 O5T-O2-BO&9-T:A?E< II PE:SO+A< EEPE:IE+CES This book is the freestanding su le(ent to The School of Outof-Body Travel I A Practical Guideboo ! It is intended to give a first-hand de(onstration of the out-of-body e- erience in racticeJ 7hile bringing attention to correct actions and (istakes (ade 7hen out-of-bodyD ItDs one thing to !no( (hich techni1ues can be used to control and leave the perception of the body, but another thing to actually !no( ho( to use those techni1ues. ItDs one thing to read descriptions of a single individualDs e$periences, but another to learn about ho( a large number of other practitioners regard the techni1ues and feel about them. 'ot everyone is able to figure out (hat e$actly to do and ho( to do it (ithout reading this boo!. Techni1ue#related theory and real e$perience are essentially t(o different things. The po(er inherent in this collection of personal practitioner e$periences is such that even if you never intend to try out the techni1ues described in it, you are practically guaranteed to nevertheless encounter this phenomenon, as it (ill enter your subconscious mind as a !ind of programming that (ill sooner or later activate at the right moment. This collection is all the more beneficial for those (ho (ould li!e to receive real guidance in their e$plorations. 0ll of the fundamental mista!es that practitioners are prone to ma!e are described and analy=ed here. 5aving read the boo!, the practitioner (ill be armed (ith !no(ledge of the most distilled and verified !ind. In preparation for this boo!, the personal e$periences of hundreds of practitioners (ere collected at seminars, through the (ebsite, and by mail. 5o(ever, only the most demonstrative descriptions (ere chosen for inclusion. Thus, the selected descriptions are invaluable not only for those (ho have &ust started out on their &ourney (ith the most e$traordinary practice of out#of#body travel, but also for those (ho already have substantial e$perience (ith it.

I (ould li!e to e$press my gratitude to all those (ho assisted me in putting together this one#of#a#!ind compilation. Oou have made a contribution to this field of study and it only remains for me to (ish you further success, (hich (ill sho( that my commentary on your e$periences (as right on. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel March 2 , 2 ! Table of *ontents+ Part ! /eaving the Perception of the 4ody Part II Out#of#4ody ,$periments Part III The ,$periences of -ell#Bno(n 0uthors Part I? 6emonstrative *ase 3tudies A endi-

www.obe4u.com

Proposals regarding translating and publishing this boo! and other (or!s of M.Raduga may be sent to obe4u@obe4u.com

This book is free via Internet, so feel free to distribute it! Send it to all your friends! Post it on your sites and blogs!